Master GuideSAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Powered by SAPNetWeaverUsing SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60 and SAP NetWeaver7 including Enhancement Package 2
Target Audience
n Technical Consultantsn System Administratorsn Project Leads
PUBLICDocument version 10 ‒ 12202010Material number 50094238
Document History
Caution
Before you start the implementation make sure you have the latest version of this document Youcan find the latest version at the following location httpservicesapcominstguides Westrongly recommend that you use the documents there The guides are updated regularly
The following table provides an overview of the most important document changes
Version Date Description
10 12202010
264 PUBLIC 12202010
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Getting Started 511 Purpose of This Document 512 How to Use This Document 513 Feedback and Comments 6
Chapter 2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP 721 Enhancement Package Key Concept 722 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview 923 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview 1124 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages 1825 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60 1826 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver 2127 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software 24271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA) 242711 Service Enablement 242712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA) 272713 Related Documentation 28272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects 29
Chapter 3 Installation of an Enhancement Package 3131 Implementation Procedure at a Glance 3132 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60
System 3333 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages 3534 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package
Installation 3635 Related Documentation 37
Chapter A Appendix 41A1 Media List 41A2 Related SAP Notes 41A3 Related Documentation 43A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape 45A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer 47A42 Using the BPR Viewer 47
12202010 PUBLIC 364
A43 Scenario and Process Component List 48A44 Using the SCLPCL 48A5 SAP Solution Manager 49A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP Solution Manager 49A6 Implementable Steps 50A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager 50
Chapter B Reference 57B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types 57
464 PUBLIC 12202010
1 Getting Started
1 Getting Started
11 Purpose of This Document
This master guide provides a central starting point for the technical implementation of theenhancement packages for SAP ERP It outlines the basic idea of the enhancement package conceptand provides an insight into the overall implementation procedure
Note
This document focuses on enhancement package 5Ensure that you use EHP5 SP03 for productive usage Any mentioning of enhancement package 5 inthis document refers to EHP5 SP03
To ensure a smooth technical implementation this guide helps you to find further information andlinks to related documents that outline business processes scenarios and software units Getting aclear picture of the implementation procedure will help you to plan and prepare all required steps ofyour project Keep inmind that additional software dependencies which are not mentioned explicitlyin the present document might exist These dependencies are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzertool available at httpservicesapcomudaFor a general overview of the available SAP documentation see The Main SAP Documentation Typesat httphelpsapcom Additional Information Docu Types In the different phases of your enhancement package implementation project different documentsand information sources support you with information We recommend to read the documents inthe following order which leads you from overview documentation to detailed documentation
n Master Guide for SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERPn SAP Business Suite 7 i2010mdash Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guiden HowmdashTo Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60n Installation Guidemdash SAP Enhancement Package Installation Using SAP ehpi
12 How to Use This Document
This Master Guide consists of the following main sectionsChapter 1 ‒ Getting Started [page 5]This chapter explains the fundamentals of this document provides an overview of the structure ofthis Master Guide and explains how to read it
12202010 PUBLIC 564
1 Getting Started13 Feedback and Comments
Chapter 2 mdash SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP [page 7]This chapter provides necessary information such as a general overview the delivery architecture andthe structure of the SAP ERP software The key facts summarize important rules and guidelinesThe chapter helps you to understand the enhancement package concept and the software componentdesign It is essential to become familiar with this so that you can set up in-depth planning for animplementation project The next milestone is to get an overview of the whole implementationprocessChapter 3 Enhancement Package Installation [page 31]Chapter 3 starts with an overview of the enhancement package implementation procedure To get aclear picture of the whole implementation and installation process the implementation steps areexplained in detail with helpful links to related informationThe Appendix [external document] provides topics like media lists or related SAP notes for yourinformation
Note
Beyond this document there are additional resources you can use for further information Theappendix also offers a chapter on additional documents [page 43] containing useful information for yourimplementation project
The appendix also provides you with an overview of generic tools for your implementation project aswell as information on the system landscape The second section of the appendix provides you withan overview of the most important documentation types at SAP
13 Feedback and Comments
SAP is interested in improving its documentation and welcomes your comments and suggestions Toshare your comments please send an email to EHP-techsapcom Please include the documenttitle and material number which can be found on the cover page
664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAPERP
21 Enhancement Package Key Concept
We have adapted our major release strategy to better fit your adoption cycle To ensure that youbenefit from new developments and innovations while minimizing the impact on your coreoperational systems SAP uses enhancement packages to speed up the delivery of new functionsWith SAP enhancement packages you can install and activate new functions depending on yourbusiness needs without having to perform a system upgradeYou can selectively implement the new functions and activate the software upon business demandAs a result you can isolate the impact of software updates and make new functions available fasterdue to shortened test cycles
Implementation
There are three different scenarios to implement an enhancement package
n Installation of an enhancement package on an existing SAP systemn New installation of an SAP system including an enhancement packagen Upgrade of an SAP system including an enhancement package
The installation process of enhancement packages consists of two different steps
n Technical installation of an enhancement packagen Activation of new functions using the switch framework technology
You have a choice on both levels ‒ installation and activation You do not need to install a fullenhancement package Instead you can update the software components that are related to thefunctional enhancements you want to useFrom a business point of view functional enhancements are grouped into business functions (BFs)The technical installation of the business functions does not change the system behavior The newfunctions are available in the system but are not active After the installation no user interface orprocess change takes place You must explicitly activate new functions so that they become visiblein the system As a result changes are predictable and there are no side effects as only the activatedareas changeWith the switch framework technology (transaction SFW5) it is possible to control the activation ofnew SAP objects in ABAP-based SAP systems The activation process triggers a background job thatautomatically performs all changes in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP21 Enhancement Package Key Concept
Caution
You cannot reverse most business function once they are activated Due to technical restrictionsonly a limited number of business functions are reversible
After you have activated a business function you can see the changes and new developments inthe SAP system for example
n Menu entries
n New screens
n New fields on the application user interfacesn IMG activities required for the implementationn New table entries in Customizing tables and system tables
You can create a transport request with the current settings of the switch framework You cancheck functional changes and the impact of an activated business function in advance in the businessfunction documentation
Recommendation
Test the installation and activation on a sandbox system
Maintenance
SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the SupportPackage versions of the underlying SAP system We highly recommend installing the enhancementpackage in combination with the latest available Support Package stack This approach reducesinstallation modification adjustment and testing effort Using this strategy you can install SAPenhancement packages as a normal maintenance activity together with Support Package stacksAn enhancement package requires a specific Support Package stack level in the source release SAPsystem If the SAP system is on a lower Support Package stack level all relevant Support Packagestacks are automatically included into the download queue as well as the latest available SupportPackages for the enhancement package
Tools
The enhancement package installation requires the following tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizern Installation or upgrade tools (depending on your scenario)
The SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (accessible from the Change Management workcenter) supports the download of a consistent queue that includes all necessary Support Packagesand enhancement packages In addition SAP Solution Manager calculates a valid import queue forthe selected SAP system and generates the enhancement package stack configuration file that yourequire for the installation
864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
For the new installation of an SAP system including enhancement package as well as for the upgradeof an SAP system to a higher release including an enhancement package you use the standardinstallation and upgrade tools (SAPinst SAPup and SAPJup) To install an enhancement packageon an existing SAP system you use the SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) It allowsenhancement packages to be installed with reduced downtime SAPehpi uses the shadow systeminstallation strategy a well-known feature in the upgrade technology
22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
Understanding the architecture of SAP ERP software is key to understanding the enhancementpackage concept This short summary provides an overview of the software components that arerelevant to SAP ERP 60 from an application and industry point of viewSAP ERP 60 is based on SAP NetWeaver 70 and consists of different product instances and softwarecomponents (see Chapter 23 [page 11]) Each of them represents a particular functional piece of thesoftware The following table gives an overview of the SAP ERP 60 software components
ABAP Components
SAP ECC 60 Add-Ons ABAP BI Content SAP SRM
EA-APPL 600 INSURANCE 600 cPROJECT SUITE40
BI Content 702 SAP SRM 50 Server
EA-FINSERV 600 IS-CWM 600 SAP CATALOG 20
EA-GLTRADE 600 IS-H 600 WFMCORE 20
EA-HR 600 IS-M 600
EA-IPPE 400 IS-OIL 600
EA-PS 600 IS-PS-CA 600
EA-RETAIL 600 IS-UT 600
ECC-DIMP 600 SAP AP 70
ES-DFPS 600 SAP-APPL 600
FI-CA 600 SAP-HR 600
FI-CAX 600 ST-PI
ERECRUIT 600 LSO (FE) 600
FINBASIS 600 SEM BW 600
JAVA Components
Java WebApplications
EP Content XI Content
12202010 PUBLIC 964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
BILLER DIRECT 60 Business Packages XI Content forApplications
LSO (CP) 600 ELSTER 20
SAP XSS 60
XECO 50
Additional Components
SAP SolutionManager
Front End
LSO (AE) 600 SAP Easy DocumentManagement 60
LSO (OP) 600 SAP GUI 620640
cProject ECL Viewer512
SEM FrontendComponents
Open PS for MSProject 202
BIBW FrontendComponents
The ABAP software units of SAP ECC 60 and the SAP SRM Server are part of SAP ERP 60 Thesoftware component BI Content includes the content that is required to install product instance ldquoSAPNW - Business Intelligencerdquo You need to install this content as wellSome other examples of product instances are
n SAP NW ‒ EP Core
n SAP NW ‒ Application Server Javan SAP XSS (Self-Services)n SAP SRM - Server
Java components include the general Java Web applications such as SAP XSS on the one hand andcontent packages on the other hand The content packages are available for the product instancesSAP NetWeaver - EP Core and SAP NetWeaver ‒ Process Integration (PI) The content is installed inaddition to product instance SAP NetWeaver - EP Core or product instance SAP NetWeaver - ProcessIntegration (PI)The software components of SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC 60 product instance SAPECC Server) shown in this figure cannot be installed individually they are always installed as oneinstance Nevertheless support packages for each subcomponent are available Therefore you canpatch each required subcomponent separatelyThe components included with the Java Web Applications are independent J2EE componentscombined in one single installation tool as product instance SAP XECO Therefore if you want toinstall one or more of these components you need the ERP Java Components installation which isperformed by SAPinst
1064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
With SAP ERP you also receive a series of industry business solutions that were formerly delivered asIndustry Solution Add-Ons These add-ons have been integrated into the product instance SAP ECCServer The following industry business solutions are available with SAP ECC 60
n SAP Catch Weight Managementn Defense Forces amp Public Securityn SAP Discrete Industries and Mill Products
n SAP HealthcareSAP Ambulatory Care Managementn SAP for Insurance
n SAP Media
n SAP Miningn SAP Oil amp Gas
n Collection and Disbursement (PSCD)n SAP Retail
n Campus Managementn SAP Telecommunications
n SAP Utilities
n Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
You can use many of the industry business solutions by activating the corresponding businessfunctions and business function sets You use them to configure your ECC system to therequirements of the industry business solution To find out which business industry solutions youcan use refer to the Product Availability Matrix at httpservicesapcompamFor more information on the different types of industry business solutions see Enhancement Packages andSoftware Components Architecture Overview [page 11]
More InformationFor more information about the SAP ERP 60 technology or about the architecture of theSwitch Framework see the ldquoMaster Guide for SAP ERP 60rdquo on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomerp-instImportant SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 see SAPNote 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
23 Enhancement Packages and Software ComponentsArchitecture Overview
Prior to the availability of the enhancement package delivery architecture it was necessary to upgradethe complete SAP system instance to a new release for example from SAP R3 46C to SAP ERP 60With enhancement packages it is now possible to update individual software components of your
12202010 PUBLIC 1164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
SAP ERP system or to install new software components always based on your choice of technicalusage For example with technical usage ldquoHuman Capital Managementrdquo you can update SAP ERP 60software component SAP_HR 600 and EA-HR 600 to SAP_HR 605 and EA-HR 605
Note
Update only software components that are related to the functions you want to use
SAP ERP 60 ECC Server consists of two different types of software components
n Application-related software components such as SAP_APPL or SAP_HRn SAP NetWeaver-related software components such as SAP_BASIS or SAP_ABA
In this example the application components in the following figure have version 600 (for exampleEA-HR 600) and the Basis (NetWeaver) components have version 700 which is the given situationwith SAP ERP 60 without any enhancement packages After installation of the technical usage Retailselected software components of the application area have been updated to a higher version such asSAP_APPL 605 EA-Retail 605 as well as the NetWeaver component to version 702
Figure 1 Application Components after Installation of Technical Usage Retail
A verification of your own component version can be evaluated by logging into your SAP ERP ABAPsystem and choosing System Status in the menu The Component Information pushbutton displaysthe details In addition each software component has its own support packages which can beimported separately (for each component) or component-wide ‒ using Support Package Stacks Inthis example the software component SAP_HR is on version 605 and Support Package level 1
Figure 2 Example for Component Information
1264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
The business functions and thus the business-related features that you plan to use will dictatewhich software components you must install in your existing system instances The following figurehelps you to understand the relationship between business functions technical usages softwarecomponents and product instances
Figure 3 Example for Mapping Process Relationship Between Technical Usages Business Functionsand Software Components
n Business FunctionThe business functions in an enhancement package define the functional scope which you canactivate and use in the supported business process A business function has two meaningsl It is the business entity that provides information about process enhancements and information
about what you have to install to use those process enhancements All required businessfunctions are summarized in the technical usage
l It is the technical entity in the ABAP instance that can be switched on using the switchframework transaction (SFW5)
Example
The business function 2 New General Ledger Accounting with the technical name FIN_GL_CI_1comprises the enhancements within the new general ledger accounting functions Thisbusiness function is part of the technical usage ldquoCentral Applicationrdquo
12202010 PUBLIC 1364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Note
For SAP ERP transaction SFW5 covers the following three types of business functions
uEnterprise Extension These business functions are available for full releases of SAP ECC(up to SAP ERP 60) You use them to activate a number of industry-independent andindustry-specific applications and business processes for each business function
uEnterprise Business Functions You use these business functions to activatethe developments for the enhancement packages SAP ERP contains bothindustry-independent and industry-specific enterprise business functions
u Industry business functions These business functions contain functions that belong tothe industry enhancements introduced with SAP ERP 60You cannot activate industry business functions of an industry business functionset parallel to other industry business functions in anABAP-based systeminstanceTherefore some business function sets are available where the requirements of severalindustries are linked with one another for example the SAP Oil and Gas with theUtilitiesbusiness function set
Business functions also provide you with a test catalog which allows you to test new functionalityand its specific documentation
n Business Function Sets The business functions are grouped in business function sets in yourABAP-based ECC system There are two types of business functions setsl General Business Function Set This contains the enterprise business functions and the
Enterprise Extensions These contain functions for the standard applications of AccountingLogistics Human Capital Management and some additional industry-specific applications
l Industry Business Function Set You use this to change your clients of an ECC system overto the applications and solutions tailored for an industry This business function set coversall industry business functions that can be used for an industry solution to be implementedexclusively on one system or one instance
Recommendation
A business function set is activated when you have activated at least one of the related businessfunctions We therefore recommend that you activate the business function set when you startconfiguring your system since the required industry-specific view of your Implementation Guideis only created once you have activated the related business function
n Technical UsageA technical usage refers to a set of product instances All product instances of a technical usagehave to be installed to enable a business function For information on the mapping of the technicalusage to business functions see SAP Note 1324838
1464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Example
l The technical usage Central Application refers to the product instance SAP ECC Server which isan ABAP main instance
l The technical usage Human Capital Management refers to two different product instances thefirst one is Human Capital Management which is an ABAP main instance and the second one isSAP Portal Content which is a JAVA main instance A technical usage tells you which softwarecomponent must be installed in your SAP ERP 60 system The main instance tells youwhere to install it in the ABAP or Java part of your system The technical usage can alsoinclude content for a SAP Portal SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BImdash previously known as SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse or SAP NetWeaver BW)) or SAPNetWeaver Exchange Insfrastructure (SAP NetWeaver XI) system
n Main Instances and Software ComponentsA software component is the smallest maintainable unit within the SAP software model thus thebasis for support packages For installation purposes a software component is assigned to one orseveral product instances All content (BI EP PI content) is shipped as software components
Example
The technical usage Central Application consists of two software components in the above figureEA-APPL 605 and SAP_APPL 605 From a technical point of view both software components mustbe installed to launch the new function New General Ledger Accounting
The product instance (or main instance) comprises a set of software components
Example
The product instance in the above figure is SAP ECC Server which consists of severalapplication-specific software components such as SAP_APPL SAP_HR or EA-Retail
With enhancement packages new or enhanced objects that are contained in special contentproduct instances are shipped The following types of content are availablel Role Content provides a single pointmdashofmdashaccess for SAP business applications reports and
technologies For example it allows a seamless integration of classic SAP GUI-based transactionsand Web Dynpro-based applications There are two different options to run role content
uSAP Netweaver Business Client (NWBC)The NWBC enables you to directly access PFCGroles on the SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP
uSAP Netweaver Enterprise Portal The Enterprise Portal (EP) enables you to run portalroles which are captured in business packages The EP allows an easy integration of JAVAapplications and supports complex multi-system scenarios
12202010 PUBLIC 1564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
l Business Intelligence content (BI content mdash previously known as SAP NetWeaverBusiness Warehouse content or SAP NetWeaver BW content) In your BW system new orchanged objects as of the enhancement packages are stored in own InfoAreas
l SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure content (XI content) and enterprise servicesAs part of the enhancement packages you receive additional enterprise services Theimplementations of these enterprise services are in the software component versions of yourABAP-based system In the XI system these enterprise services are grouped in their ownsoftware components and namespaces for the enhancement packages For more informationabout these enterprise services see the documentation of the business function and therelated release notes
The following figure explains the relationship between business functions technical usage andsoftware components using the business function example HCM Administrative Services 03 You canuse this business function to get the latest functions for HCM processes and formsThe business function HCM Administrative Services 03 is mapped to the technical usage Human CapitalManagement This technical usage requires several product instances such as SAP ECC ServerSAP NW ‒ EP Core and SAP Portal Content As you can see in the figure the technical usagehighlighted in yellow is the only grouping entity stretched across different product instances
Figure 4 Software Architecture SAP ERP ‒ Example Human Capital Management BusinessFunction HCM Administrative Services HCM_ASR_CI_3
From a technical point of view you install software components SAP_HR 605 and EA_HR 605 inyour SAP ECC Server system as well as the related enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70
1664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Business packages related to HCM Administrative Services and portal content are deployed inthe Java part of the SAP NW ‒ EP core system
Industry Business Solutions
As mentioned in the previous chapter [page 9] industry business solutions have been integrated into theSAP ECC Server There are different ways to make the functionality for an industry business solutionavailable SAP ERP therefore distinguishes between the following types of industry business solutions
n Industry business solutions delivered as central component These industry businesssolutions are available immediately after the installation of the product instance SAP ECC youdo not have to activate a business function
n Industry business solutions available as business function set (industry enhancement)Youuse the business function set to activate the industry-specific functions that change your ECCsystem over to the requirements of a specific industry These business function sets are alsoavailable with SAP ECC you do not have to install an add-on
n Industry-specific business processes or industry business solutions delivered as EnterpriseExtension or Enterprise business function
n Industry business solutions delivered as add-on You have to install these industry businesssolutions separately
More Information
n Further details of the relationship between business functions technical usage product instancesand software components are visible in the mapping of business functions to technical usagesSee PDF attachment in the SAP Note 1324838
n The ldquoApplication Operation Guide for SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo containsthe component matrix for ABAP and Java components as well as for additional componentsThe guide is available at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement packages 5 for SAP ERP 60 ldquoSOG SAP enhancement packages5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo
n For more information about the different industries refer to the individual Master Guides for eachindustry You find them at httpservicesapcominstguides Note that the Master Guidesfor the industries cover industry scenarios running in the entire SAP Business Suite not justSAP ERP
n For more information on the individual business functions see wwwhelpsapcom SAP ERPSAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60) Business Functions in SAP ERP
n For more information on roles refer to SAP Note 1522708
12202010 PUBLIC 1764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
The following list summarizes important facts about the enhancement package concept andrecommended approaches
n Install only selected parts of the enhancement package The selection is driven by the functionalneed from a business point of view
n You cannot mix the installation of different enhancement package versions in your ABAP-basedSAP system You can have just one enhancement package version in the SAP system
n SAP enhancement packages are cumulative meaning that each new enhancement packageincludes new innovations of its own as well as all innovations delivered with prior packages
n We recommend installing the latest available enhancement package versionn Install enhancement packages and Support Packages in one single step (this includes the
preconditioned Support Packages)n SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the Support
Package versions of the underlying SAP systemn SAP enhancement packages have the same maintenance period as the underlying core applicationn The installation of an enhancement package is irreversible
n As long as you do not activate a business function the installation of an enhancement packagehas no impact on existing business processes or user interfacesYou can only activate business functions in ABAP-based systems not in Java-based SAP systems
n The activation of most business functions and extension sets is irreversible Only a small numberof business functions is reversibleTest the installation process and activation of new functions in advance on a sandbox systemEnsure that you evaluate the runtime and the SAP system behavior its dependencies and impactsMake sure that your SAP system is free of errors before going live
25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
This chapter provides an overview of the technical changes that are included with the latest availableenhancement package version
n Use of SAP Solution Manager ismandatory Ensure that you have installed SAP SolutionManager SP23 or higher Also ensure that you have correctly defined and maintained yoursystem landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY)As of enhancement package 5 the add-on landscape verification 10 for SAP Solution Manageris available This add-on allows you to identify issues in your SAP Solution Manager landscape(transaction SMSY) before they cause problems for example during a system update Example for
1864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
Document History
Caution
Before you start the implementation make sure you have the latest version of this document Youcan find the latest version at the following location httpservicesapcominstguides Westrongly recommend that you use the documents there The guides are updated regularly
The following table provides an overview of the most important document changes
Version Date Description
10 12202010
264 PUBLIC 12202010
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Getting Started 511 Purpose of This Document 512 How to Use This Document 513 Feedback and Comments 6
Chapter 2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP 721 Enhancement Package Key Concept 722 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview 923 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview 1124 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages 1825 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60 1826 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver 2127 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software 24271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA) 242711 Service Enablement 242712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA) 272713 Related Documentation 28272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects 29
Chapter 3 Installation of an Enhancement Package 3131 Implementation Procedure at a Glance 3132 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60
System 3333 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages 3534 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package
Installation 3635 Related Documentation 37
Chapter A Appendix 41A1 Media List 41A2 Related SAP Notes 41A3 Related Documentation 43A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape 45A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer 47A42 Using the BPR Viewer 47
12202010 PUBLIC 364
A43 Scenario and Process Component List 48A44 Using the SCLPCL 48A5 SAP Solution Manager 49A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP Solution Manager 49A6 Implementable Steps 50A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager 50
Chapter B Reference 57B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types 57
464 PUBLIC 12202010
1 Getting Started
1 Getting Started
11 Purpose of This Document
This master guide provides a central starting point for the technical implementation of theenhancement packages for SAP ERP It outlines the basic idea of the enhancement package conceptand provides an insight into the overall implementation procedure
Note
This document focuses on enhancement package 5Ensure that you use EHP5 SP03 for productive usage Any mentioning of enhancement package 5 inthis document refers to EHP5 SP03
To ensure a smooth technical implementation this guide helps you to find further information andlinks to related documents that outline business processes scenarios and software units Getting aclear picture of the implementation procedure will help you to plan and prepare all required steps ofyour project Keep inmind that additional software dependencies which are not mentioned explicitlyin the present document might exist These dependencies are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzertool available at httpservicesapcomudaFor a general overview of the available SAP documentation see The Main SAP Documentation Typesat httphelpsapcom Additional Information Docu Types In the different phases of your enhancement package implementation project different documentsand information sources support you with information We recommend to read the documents inthe following order which leads you from overview documentation to detailed documentation
n Master Guide for SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERPn SAP Business Suite 7 i2010mdash Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guiden HowmdashTo Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60n Installation Guidemdash SAP Enhancement Package Installation Using SAP ehpi
12 How to Use This Document
This Master Guide consists of the following main sectionsChapter 1 ‒ Getting Started [page 5]This chapter explains the fundamentals of this document provides an overview of the structure ofthis Master Guide and explains how to read it
12202010 PUBLIC 564
1 Getting Started13 Feedback and Comments
Chapter 2 mdash SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP [page 7]This chapter provides necessary information such as a general overview the delivery architecture andthe structure of the SAP ERP software The key facts summarize important rules and guidelinesThe chapter helps you to understand the enhancement package concept and the software componentdesign It is essential to become familiar with this so that you can set up in-depth planning for animplementation project The next milestone is to get an overview of the whole implementationprocessChapter 3 Enhancement Package Installation [page 31]Chapter 3 starts with an overview of the enhancement package implementation procedure To get aclear picture of the whole implementation and installation process the implementation steps areexplained in detail with helpful links to related informationThe Appendix [external document] provides topics like media lists or related SAP notes for yourinformation
Note
Beyond this document there are additional resources you can use for further information Theappendix also offers a chapter on additional documents [page 43] containing useful information for yourimplementation project
The appendix also provides you with an overview of generic tools for your implementation project aswell as information on the system landscape The second section of the appendix provides you withan overview of the most important documentation types at SAP
13 Feedback and Comments
SAP is interested in improving its documentation and welcomes your comments and suggestions Toshare your comments please send an email to EHP-techsapcom Please include the documenttitle and material number which can be found on the cover page
664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAPERP
21 Enhancement Package Key Concept
We have adapted our major release strategy to better fit your adoption cycle To ensure that youbenefit from new developments and innovations while minimizing the impact on your coreoperational systems SAP uses enhancement packages to speed up the delivery of new functionsWith SAP enhancement packages you can install and activate new functions depending on yourbusiness needs without having to perform a system upgradeYou can selectively implement the new functions and activate the software upon business demandAs a result you can isolate the impact of software updates and make new functions available fasterdue to shortened test cycles
Implementation
There are three different scenarios to implement an enhancement package
n Installation of an enhancement package on an existing SAP systemn New installation of an SAP system including an enhancement packagen Upgrade of an SAP system including an enhancement package
The installation process of enhancement packages consists of two different steps
n Technical installation of an enhancement packagen Activation of new functions using the switch framework technology
You have a choice on both levels ‒ installation and activation You do not need to install a fullenhancement package Instead you can update the software components that are related to thefunctional enhancements you want to useFrom a business point of view functional enhancements are grouped into business functions (BFs)The technical installation of the business functions does not change the system behavior The newfunctions are available in the system but are not active After the installation no user interface orprocess change takes place You must explicitly activate new functions so that they become visiblein the system As a result changes are predictable and there are no side effects as only the activatedareas changeWith the switch framework technology (transaction SFW5) it is possible to control the activation ofnew SAP objects in ABAP-based SAP systems The activation process triggers a background job thatautomatically performs all changes in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP21 Enhancement Package Key Concept
Caution
You cannot reverse most business function once they are activated Due to technical restrictionsonly a limited number of business functions are reversible
After you have activated a business function you can see the changes and new developments inthe SAP system for example
n Menu entries
n New screens
n New fields on the application user interfacesn IMG activities required for the implementationn New table entries in Customizing tables and system tables
You can create a transport request with the current settings of the switch framework You cancheck functional changes and the impact of an activated business function in advance in the businessfunction documentation
Recommendation
Test the installation and activation on a sandbox system
Maintenance
SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the SupportPackage versions of the underlying SAP system We highly recommend installing the enhancementpackage in combination with the latest available Support Package stack This approach reducesinstallation modification adjustment and testing effort Using this strategy you can install SAPenhancement packages as a normal maintenance activity together with Support Package stacksAn enhancement package requires a specific Support Package stack level in the source release SAPsystem If the SAP system is on a lower Support Package stack level all relevant Support Packagestacks are automatically included into the download queue as well as the latest available SupportPackages for the enhancement package
Tools
The enhancement package installation requires the following tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizern Installation or upgrade tools (depending on your scenario)
The SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (accessible from the Change Management workcenter) supports the download of a consistent queue that includes all necessary Support Packagesand enhancement packages In addition SAP Solution Manager calculates a valid import queue forthe selected SAP system and generates the enhancement package stack configuration file that yourequire for the installation
864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
For the new installation of an SAP system including enhancement package as well as for the upgradeof an SAP system to a higher release including an enhancement package you use the standardinstallation and upgrade tools (SAPinst SAPup and SAPJup) To install an enhancement packageon an existing SAP system you use the SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) It allowsenhancement packages to be installed with reduced downtime SAPehpi uses the shadow systeminstallation strategy a well-known feature in the upgrade technology
22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
Understanding the architecture of SAP ERP software is key to understanding the enhancementpackage concept This short summary provides an overview of the software components that arerelevant to SAP ERP 60 from an application and industry point of viewSAP ERP 60 is based on SAP NetWeaver 70 and consists of different product instances and softwarecomponents (see Chapter 23 [page 11]) Each of them represents a particular functional piece of thesoftware The following table gives an overview of the SAP ERP 60 software components
ABAP Components
SAP ECC 60 Add-Ons ABAP BI Content SAP SRM
EA-APPL 600 INSURANCE 600 cPROJECT SUITE40
BI Content 702 SAP SRM 50 Server
EA-FINSERV 600 IS-CWM 600 SAP CATALOG 20
EA-GLTRADE 600 IS-H 600 WFMCORE 20
EA-HR 600 IS-M 600
EA-IPPE 400 IS-OIL 600
EA-PS 600 IS-PS-CA 600
EA-RETAIL 600 IS-UT 600
ECC-DIMP 600 SAP AP 70
ES-DFPS 600 SAP-APPL 600
FI-CA 600 SAP-HR 600
FI-CAX 600 ST-PI
ERECRUIT 600 LSO (FE) 600
FINBASIS 600 SEM BW 600
JAVA Components
Java WebApplications
EP Content XI Content
12202010 PUBLIC 964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
BILLER DIRECT 60 Business Packages XI Content forApplications
LSO (CP) 600 ELSTER 20
SAP XSS 60
XECO 50
Additional Components
SAP SolutionManager
Front End
LSO (AE) 600 SAP Easy DocumentManagement 60
LSO (OP) 600 SAP GUI 620640
cProject ECL Viewer512
SEM FrontendComponents
Open PS for MSProject 202
BIBW FrontendComponents
The ABAP software units of SAP ECC 60 and the SAP SRM Server are part of SAP ERP 60 Thesoftware component BI Content includes the content that is required to install product instance ldquoSAPNW - Business Intelligencerdquo You need to install this content as wellSome other examples of product instances are
n SAP NW ‒ EP Core
n SAP NW ‒ Application Server Javan SAP XSS (Self-Services)n SAP SRM - Server
Java components include the general Java Web applications such as SAP XSS on the one hand andcontent packages on the other hand The content packages are available for the product instancesSAP NetWeaver - EP Core and SAP NetWeaver ‒ Process Integration (PI) The content is installed inaddition to product instance SAP NetWeaver - EP Core or product instance SAP NetWeaver - ProcessIntegration (PI)The software components of SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC 60 product instance SAPECC Server) shown in this figure cannot be installed individually they are always installed as oneinstance Nevertheless support packages for each subcomponent are available Therefore you canpatch each required subcomponent separatelyThe components included with the Java Web Applications are independent J2EE componentscombined in one single installation tool as product instance SAP XECO Therefore if you want toinstall one or more of these components you need the ERP Java Components installation which isperformed by SAPinst
1064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
With SAP ERP you also receive a series of industry business solutions that were formerly delivered asIndustry Solution Add-Ons These add-ons have been integrated into the product instance SAP ECCServer The following industry business solutions are available with SAP ECC 60
n SAP Catch Weight Managementn Defense Forces amp Public Securityn SAP Discrete Industries and Mill Products
n SAP HealthcareSAP Ambulatory Care Managementn SAP for Insurance
n SAP Media
n SAP Miningn SAP Oil amp Gas
n Collection and Disbursement (PSCD)n SAP Retail
n Campus Managementn SAP Telecommunications
n SAP Utilities
n Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
You can use many of the industry business solutions by activating the corresponding businessfunctions and business function sets You use them to configure your ECC system to therequirements of the industry business solution To find out which business industry solutions youcan use refer to the Product Availability Matrix at httpservicesapcompamFor more information on the different types of industry business solutions see Enhancement Packages andSoftware Components Architecture Overview [page 11]
More InformationFor more information about the SAP ERP 60 technology or about the architecture of theSwitch Framework see the ldquoMaster Guide for SAP ERP 60rdquo on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomerp-instImportant SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 see SAPNote 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
23 Enhancement Packages and Software ComponentsArchitecture Overview
Prior to the availability of the enhancement package delivery architecture it was necessary to upgradethe complete SAP system instance to a new release for example from SAP R3 46C to SAP ERP 60With enhancement packages it is now possible to update individual software components of your
12202010 PUBLIC 1164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
SAP ERP system or to install new software components always based on your choice of technicalusage For example with technical usage ldquoHuman Capital Managementrdquo you can update SAP ERP 60software component SAP_HR 600 and EA-HR 600 to SAP_HR 605 and EA-HR 605
Note
Update only software components that are related to the functions you want to use
SAP ERP 60 ECC Server consists of two different types of software components
n Application-related software components such as SAP_APPL or SAP_HRn SAP NetWeaver-related software components such as SAP_BASIS or SAP_ABA
In this example the application components in the following figure have version 600 (for exampleEA-HR 600) and the Basis (NetWeaver) components have version 700 which is the given situationwith SAP ERP 60 without any enhancement packages After installation of the technical usage Retailselected software components of the application area have been updated to a higher version such asSAP_APPL 605 EA-Retail 605 as well as the NetWeaver component to version 702
Figure 1 Application Components after Installation of Technical Usage Retail
A verification of your own component version can be evaluated by logging into your SAP ERP ABAPsystem and choosing System Status in the menu The Component Information pushbutton displaysthe details In addition each software component has its own support packages which can beimported separately (for each component) or component-wide ‒ using Support Package Stacks Inthis example the software component SAP_HR is on version 605 and Support Package level 1
Figure 2 Example for Component Information
1264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
The business functions and thus the business-related features that you plan to use will dictatewhich software components you must install in your existing system instances The following figurehelps you to understand the relationship between business functions technical usages softwarecomponents and product instances
Figure 3 Example for Mapping Process Relationship Between Technical Usages Business Functionsand Software Components
n Business FunctionThe business functions in an enhancement package define the functional scope which you canactivate and use in the supported business process A business function has two meaningsl It is the business entity that provides information about process enhancements and information
about what you have to install to use those process enhancements All required businessfunctions are summarized in the technical usage
l It is the technical entity in the ABAP instance that can be switched on using the switchframework transaction (SFW5)
Example
The business function 2 New General Ledger Accounting with the technical name FIN_GL_CI_1comprises the enhancements within the new general ledger accounting functions Thisbusiness function is part of the technical usage ldquoCentral Applicationrdquo
12202010 PUBLIC 1364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Note
For SAP ERP transaction SFW5 covers the following three types of business functions
uEnterprise Extension These business functions are available for full releases of SAP ECC(up to SAP ERP 60) You use them to activate a number of industry-independent andindustry-specific applications and business processes for each business function
uEnterprise Business Functions You use these business functions to activatethe developments for the enhancement packages SAP ERP contains bothindustry-independent and industry-specific enterprise business functions
u Industry business functions These business functions contain functions that belong tothe industry enhancements introduced with SAP ERP 60You cannot activate industry business functions of an industry business functionset parallel to other industry business functions in anABAP-based systeminstanceTherefore some business function sets are available where the requirements of severalindustries are linked with one another for example the SAP Oil and Gas with theUtilitiesbusiness function set
Business functions also provide you with a test catalog which allows you to test new functionalityand its specific documentation
n Business Function Sets The business functions are grouped in business function sets in yourABAP-based ECC system There are two types of business functions setsl General Business Function Set This contains the enterprise business functions and the
Enterprise Extensions These contain functions for the standard applications of AccountingLogistics Human Capital Management and some additional industry-specific applications
l Industry Business Function Set You use this to change your clients of an ECC system overto the applications and solutions tailored for an industry This business function set coversall industry business functions that can be used for an industry solution to be implementedexclusively on one system or one instance
Recommendation
A business function set is activated when you have activated at least one of the related businessfunctions We therefore recommend that you activate the business function set when you startconfiguring your system since the required industry-specific view of your Implementation Guideis only created once you have activated the related business function
n Technical UsageA technical usage refers to a set of product instances All product instances of a technical usagehave to be installed to enable a business function For information on the mapping of the technicalusage to business functions see SAP Note 1324838
1464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Example
l The technical usage Central Application refers to the product instance SAP ECC Server which isan ABAP main instance
l The technical usage Human Capital Management refers to two different product instances thefirst one is Human Capital Management which is an ABAP main instance and the second one isSAP Portal Content which is a JAVA main instance A technical usage tells you which softwarecomponent must be installed in your SAP ERP 60 system The main instance tells youwhere to install it in the ABAP or Java part of your system The technical usage can alsoinclude content for a SAP Portal SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BImdash previously known as SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse or SAP NetWeaver BW)) or SAPNetWeaver Exchange Insfrastructure (SAP NetWeaver XI) system
n Main Instances and Software ComponentsA software component is the smallest maintainable unit within the SAP software model thus thebasis for support packages For installation purposes a software component is assigned to one orseveral product instances All content (BI EP PI content) is shipped as software components
Example
The technical usage Central Application consists of two software components in the above figureEA-APPL 605 and SAP_APPL 605 From a technical point of view both software components mustbe installed to launch the new function New General Ledger Accounting
The product instance (or main instance) comprises a set of software components
Example
The product instance in the above figure is SAP ECC Server which consists of severalapplication-specific software components such as SAP_APPL SAP_HR or EA-Retail
With enhancement packages new or enhanced objects that are contained in special contentproduct instances are shipped The following types of content are availablel Role Content provides a single pointmdashofmdashaccess for SAP business applications reports and
technologies For example it allows a seamless integration of classic SAP GUI-based transactionsand Web Dynpro-based applications There are two different options to run role content
uSAP Netweaver Business Client (NWBC)The NWBC enables you to directly access PFCGroles on the SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP
uSAP Netweaver Enterprise Portal The Enterprise Portal (EP) enables you to run portalroles which are captured in business packages The EP allows an easy integration of JAVAapplications and supports complex multi-system scenarios
12202010 PUBLIC 1564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
l Business Intelligence content (BI content mdash previously known as SAP NetWeaverBusiness Warehouse content or SAP NetWeaver BW content) In your BW system new orchanged objects as of the enhancement packages are stored in own InfoAreas
l SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure content (XI content) and enterprise servicesAs part of the enhancement packages you receive additional enterprise services Theimplementations of these enterprise services are in the software component versions of yourABAP-based system In the XI system these enterprise services are grouped in their ownsoftware components and namespaces for the enhancement packages For more informationabout these enterprise services see the documentation of the business function and therelated release notes
The following figure explains the relationship between business functions technical usage andsoftware components using the business function example HCM Administrative Services 03 You canuse this business function to get the latest functions for HCM processes and formsThe business function HCM Administrative Services 03 is mapped to the technical usage Human CapitalManagement This technical usage requires several product instances such as SAP ECC ServerSAP NW ‒ EP Core and SAP Portal Content As you can see in the figure the technical usagehighlighted in yellow is the only grouping entity stretched across different product instances
Figure 4 Software Architecture SAP ERP ‒ Example Human Capital Management BusinessFunction HCM Administrative Services HCM_ASR_CI_3
From a technical point of view you install software components SAP_HR 605 and EA_HR 605 inyour SAP ECC Server system as well as the related enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70
1664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Business packages related to HCM Administrative Services and portal content are deployed inthe Java part of the SAP NW ‒ EP core system
Industry Business Solutions
As mentioned in the previous chapter [page 9] industry business solutions have been integrated into theSAP ECC Server There are different ways to make the functionality for an industry business solutionavailable SAP ERP therefore distinguishes between the following types of industry business solutions
n Industry business solutions delivered as central component These industry businesssolutions are available immediately after the installation of the product instance SAP ECC youdo not have to activate a business function
n Industry business solutions available as business function set (industry enhancement)Youuse the business function set to activate the industry-specific functions that change your ECCsystem over to the requirements of a specific industry These business function sets are alsoavailable with SAP ECC you do not have to install an add-on
n Industry-specific business processes or industry business solutions delivered as EnterpriseExtension or Enterprise business function
n Industry business solutions delivered as add-on You have to install these industry businesssolutions separately
More Information
n Further details of the relationship between business functions technical usage product instancesand software components are visible in the mapping of business functions to technical usagesSee PDF attachment in the SAP Note 1324838
n The ldquoApplication Operation Guide for SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo containsthe component matrix for ABAP and Java components as well as for additional componentsThe guide is available at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement packages 5 for SAP ERP 60 ldquoSOG SAP enhancement packages5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo
n For more information about the different industries refer to the individual Master Guides for eachindustry You find them at httpservicesapcominstguides Note that the Master Guidesfor the industries cover industry scenarios running in the entire SAP Business Suite not justSAP ERP
n For more information on the individual business functions see wwwhelpsapcom SAP ERPSAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60) Business Functions in SAP ERP
n For more information on roles refer to SAP Note 1522708
12202010 PUBLIC 1764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
The following list summarizes important facts about the enhancement package concept andrecommended approaches
n Install only selected parts of the enhancement package The selection is driven by the functionalneed from a business point of view
n You cannot mix the installation of different enhancement package versions in your ABAP-basedSAP system You can have just one enhancement package version in the SAP system
n SAP enhancement packages are cumulative meaning that each new enhancement packageincludes new innovations of its own as well as all innovations delivered with prior packages
n We recommend installing the latest available enhancement package versionn Install enhancement packages and Support Packages in one single step (this includes the
preconditioned Support Packages)n SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the Support
Package versions of the underlying SAP systemn SAP enhancement packages have the same maintenance period as the underlying core applicationn The installation of an enhancement package is irreversible
n As long as you do not activate a business function the installation of an enhancement packagehas no impact on existing business processes or user interfacesYou can only activate business functions in ABAP-based systems not in Java-based SAP systems
n The activation of most business functions and extension sets is irreversible Only a small numberof business functions is reversibleTest the installation process and activation of new functions in advance on a sandbox systemEnsure that you evaluate the runtime and the SAP system behavior its dependencies and impactsMake sure that your SAP system is free of errors before going live
25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
This chapter provides an overview of the technical changes that are included with the latest availableenhancement package version
n Use of SAP Solution Manager ismandatory Ensure that you have installed SAP SolutionManager SP23 or higher Also ensure that you have correctly defined and maintained yoursystem landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY)As of enhancement package 5 the add-on landscape verification 10 for SAP Solution Manageris available This add-on allows you to identify issues in your SAP Solution Manager landscape(transaction SMSY) before they cause problems for example during a system update Example for
1864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Getting Started 511 Purpose of This Document 512 How to Use This Document 513 Feedback and Comments 6
Chapter 2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP 721 Enhancement Package Key Concept 722 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview 923 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview 1124 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages 1825 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60 1826 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver 2127 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software 24271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA) 242711 Service Enablement 242712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA) 272713 Related Documentation 28272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects 29
Chapter 3 Installation of an Enhancement Package 3131 Implementation Procedure at a Glance 3132 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60
System 3333 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages 3534 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package
Installation 3635 Related Documentation 37
Chapter A Appendix 41A1 Media List 41A2 Related SAP Notes 41A3 Related Documentation 43A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape 45A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer 47A42 Using the BPR Viewer 47
12202010 PUBLIC 364
A43 Scenario and Process Component List 48A44 Using the SCLPCL 48A5 SAP Solution Manager 49A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP Solution Manager 49A6 Implementable Steps 50A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager 50
Chapter B Reference 57B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types 57
464 PUBLIC 12202010
1 Getting Started
1 Getting Started
11 Purpose of This Document
This master guide provides a central starting point for the technical implementation of theenhancement packages for SAP ERP It outlines the basic idea of the enhancement package conceptand provides an insight into the overall implementation procedure
Note
This document focuses on enhancement package 5Ensure that you use EHP5 SP03 for productive usage Any mentioning of enhancement package 5 inthis document refers to EHP5 SP03
To ensure a smooth technical implementation this guide helps you to find further information andlinks to related documents that outline business processes scenarios and software units Getting aclear picture of the implementation procedure will help you to plan and prepare all required steps ofyour project Keep inmind that additional software dependencies which are not mentioned explicitlyin the present document might exist These dependencies are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzertool available at httpservicesapcomudaFor a general overview of the available SAP documentation see The Main SAP Documentation Typesat httphelpsapcom Additional Information Docu Types In the different phases of your enhancement package implementation project different documentsand information sources support you with information We recommend to read the documents inthe following order which leads you from overview documentation to detailed documentation
n Master Guide for SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERPn SAP Business Suite 7 i2010mdash Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guiden HowmdashTo Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60n Installation Guidemdash SAP Enhancement Package Installation Using SAP ehpi
12 How to Use This Document
This Master Guide consists of the following main sectionsChapter 1 ‒ Getting Started [page 5]This chapter explains the fundamentals of this document provides an overview of the structure ofthis Master Guide and explains how to read it
12202010 PUBLIC 564
1 Getting Started13 Feedback and Comments
Chapter 2 mdash SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP [page 7]This chapter provides necessary information such as a general overview the delivery architecture andthe structure of the SAP ERP software The key facts summarize important rules and guidelinesThe chapter helps you to understand the enhancement package concept and the software componentdesign It is essential to become familiar with this so that you can set up in-depth planning for animplementation project The next milestone is to get an overview of the whole implementationprocessChapter 3 Enhancement Package Installation [page 31]Chapter 3 starts with an overview of the enhancement package implementation procedure To get aclear picture of the whole implementation and installation process the implementation steps areexplained in detail with helpful links to related informationThe Appendix [external document] provides topics like media lists or related SAP notes for yourinformation
Note
Beyond this document there are additional resources you can use for further information Theappendix also offers a chapter on additional documents [page 43] containing useful information for yourimplementation project
The appendix also provides you with an overview of generic tools for your implementation project aswell as information on the system landscape The second section of the appendix provides you withan overview of the most important documentation types at SAP
13 Feedback and Comments
SAP is interested in improving its documentation and welcomes your comments and suggestions Toshare your comments please send an email to EHP-techsapcom Please include the documenttitle and material number which can be found on the cover page
664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAPERP
21 Enhancement Package Key Concept
We have adapted our major release strategy to better fit your adoption cycle To ensure that youbenefit from new developments and innovations while minimizing the impact on your coreoperational systems SAP uses enhancement packages to speed up the delivery of new functionsWith SAP enhancement packages you can install and activate new functions depending on yourbusiness needs without having to perform a system upgradeYou can selectively implement the new functions and activate the software upon business demandAs a result you can isolate the impact of software updates and make new functions available fasterdue to shortened test cycles
Implementation
There are three different scenarios to implement an enhancement package
n Installation of an enhancement package on an existing SAP systemn New installation of an SAP system including an enhancement packagen Upgrade of an SAP system including an enhancement package
The installation process of enhancement packages consists of two different steps
n Technical installation of an enhancement packagen Activation of new functions using the switch framework technology
You have a choice on both levels ‒ installation and activation You do not need to install a fullenhancement package Instead you can update the software components that are related to thefunctional enhancements you want to useFrom a business point of view functional enhancements are grouped into business functions (BFs)The technical installation of the business functions does not change the system behavior The newfunctions are available in the system but are not active After the installation no user interface orprocess change takes place You must explicitly activate new functions so that they become visiblein the system As a result changes are predictable and there are no side effects as only the activatedareas changeWith the switch framework technology (transaction SFW5) it is possible to control the activation ofnew SAP objects in ABAP-based SAP systems The activation process triggers a background job thatautomatically performs all changes in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP21 Enhancement Package Key Concept
Caution
You cannot reverse most business function once they are activated Due to technical restrictionsonly a limited number of business functions are reversible
After you have activated a business function you can see the changes and new developments inthe SAP system for example
n Menu entries
n New screens
n New fields on the application user interfacesn IMG activities required for the implementationn New table entries in Customizing tables and system tables
You can create a transport request with the current settings of the switch framework You cancheck functional changes and the impact of an activated business function in advance in the businessfunction documentation
Recommendation
Test the installation and activation on a sandbox system
Maintenance
SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the SupportPackage versions of the underlying SAP system We highly recommend installing the enhancementpackage in combination with the latest available Support Package stack This approach reducesinstallation modification adjustment and testing effort Using this strategy you can install SAPenhancement packages as a normal maintenance activity together with Support Package stacksAn enhancement package requires a specific Support Package stack level in the source release SAPsystem If the SAP system is on a lower Support Package stack level all relevant Support Packagestacks are automatically included into the download queue as well as the latest available SupportPackages for the enhancement package
Tools
The enhancement package installation requires the following tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizern Installation or upgrade tools (depending on your scenario)
The SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (accessible from the Change Management workcenter) supports the download of a consistent queue that includes all necessary Support Packagesand enhancement packages In addition SAP Solution Manager calculates a valid import queue forthe selected SAP system and generates the enhancement package stack configuration file that yourequire for the installation
864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
For the new installation of an SAP system including enhancement package as well as for the upgradeof an SAP system to a higher release including an enhancement package you use the standardinstallation and upgrade tools (SAPinst SAPup and SAPJup) To install an enhancement packageon an existing SAP system you use the SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) It allowsenhancement packages to be installed with reduced downtime SAPehpi uses the shadow systeminstallation strategy a well-known feature in the upgrade technology
22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
Understanding the architecture of SAP ERP software is key to understanding the enhancementpackage concept This short summary provides an overview of the software components that arerelevant to SAP ERP 60 from an application and industry point of viewSAP ERP 60 is based on SAP NetWeaver 70 and consists of different product instances and softwarecomponents (see Chapter 23 [page 11]) Each of them represents a particular functional piece of thesoftware The following table gives an overview of the SAP ERP 60 software components
ABAP Components
SAP ECC 60 Add-Ons ABAP BI Content SAP SRM
EA-APPL 600 INSURANCE 600 cPROJECT SUITE40
BI Content 702 SAP SRM 50 Server
EA-FINSERV 600 IS-CWM 600 SAP CATALOG 20
EA-GLTRADE 600 IS-H 600 WFMCORE 20
EA-HR 600 IS-M 600
EA-IPPE 400 IS-OIL 600
EA-PS 600 IS-PS-CA 600
EA-RETAIL 600 IS-UT 600
ECC-DIMP 600 SAP AP 70
ES-DFPS 600 SAP-APPL 600
FI-CA 600 SAP-HR 600
FI-CAX 600 ST-PI
ERECRUIT 600 LSO (FE) 600
FINBASIS 600 SEM BW 600
JAVA Components
Java WebApplications
EP Content XI Content
12202010 PUBLIC 964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
BILLER DIRECT 60 Business Packages XI Content forApplications
LSO (CP) 600 ELSTER 20
SAP XSS 60
XECO 50
Additional Components
SAP SolutionManager
Front End
LSO (AE) 600 SAP Easy DocumentManagement 60
LSO (OP) 600 SAP GUI 620640
cProject ECL Viewer512
SEM FrontendComponents
Open PS for MSProject 202
BIBW FrontendComponents
The ABAP software units of SAP ECC 60 and the SAP SRM Server are part of SAP ERP 60 Thesoftware component BI Content includes the content that is required to install product instance ldquoSAPNW - Business Intelligencerdquo You need to install this content as wellSome other examples of product instances are
n SAP NW ‒ EP Core
n SAP NW ‒ Application Server Javan SAP XSS (Self-Services)n SAP SRM - Server
Java components include the general Java Web applications such as SAP XSS on the one hand andcontent packages on the other hand The content packages are available for the product instancesSAP NetWeaver - EP Core and SAP NetWeaver ‒ Process Integration (PI) The content is installed inaddition to product instance SAP NetWeaver - EP Core or product instance SAP NetWeaver - ProcessIntegration (PI)The software components of SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC 60 product instance SAPECC Server) shown in this figure cannot be installed individually they are always installed as oneinstance Nevertheless support packages for each subcomponent are available Therefore you canpatch each required subcomponent separatelyThe components included with the Java Web Applications are independent J2EE componentscombined in one single installation tool as product instance SAP XECO Therefore if you want toinstall one or more of these components you need the ERP Java Components installation which isperformed by SAPinst
1064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
With SAP ERP you also receive a series of industry business solutions that were formerly delivered asIndustry Solution Add-Ons These add-ons have been integrated into the product instance SAP ECCServer The following industry business solutions are available with SAP ECC 60
n SAP Catch Weight Managementn Defense Forces amp Public Securityn SAP Discrete Industries and Mill Products
n SAP HealthcareSAP Ambulatory Care Managementn SAP for Insurance
n SAP Media
n SAP Miningn SAP Oil amp Gas
n Collection and Disbursement (PSCD)n SAP Retail
n Campus Managementn SAP Telecommunications
n SAP Utilities
n Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
You can use many of the industry business solutions by activating the corresponding businessfunctions and business function sets You use them to configure your ECC system to therequirements of the industry business solution To find out which business industry solutions youcan use refer to the Product Availability Matrix at httpservicesapcompamFor more information on the different types of industry business solutions see Enhancement Packages andSoftware Components Architecture Overview [page 11]
More InformationFor more information about the SAP ERP 60 technology or about the architecture of theSwitch Framework see the ldquoMaster Guide for SAP ERP 60rdquo on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomerp-instImportant SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 see SAPNote 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
23 Enhancement Packages and Software ComponentsArchitecture Overview
Prior to the availability of the enhancement package delivery architecture it was necessary to upgradethe complete SAP system instance to a new release for example from SAP R3 46C to SAP ERP 60With enhancement packages it is now possible to update individual software components of your
12202010 PUBLIC 1164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
SAP ERP system or to install new software components always based on your choice of technicalusage For example with technical usage ldquoHuman Capital Managementrdquo you can update SAP ERP 60software component SAP_HR 600 and EA-HR 600 to SAP_HR 605 and EA-HR 605
Note
Update only software components that are related to the functions you want to use
SAP ERP 60 ECC Server consists of two different types of software components
n Application-related software components such as SAP_APPL or SAP_HRn SAP NetWeaver-related software components such as SAP_BASIS or SAP_ABA
In this example the application components in the following figure have version 600 (for exampleEA-HR 600) and the Basis (NetWeaver) components have version 700 which is the given situationwith SAP ERP 60 without any enhancement packages After installation of the technical usage Retailselected software components of the application area have been updated to a higher version such asSAP_APPL 605 EA-Retail 605 as well as the NetWeaver component to version 702
Figure 1 Application Components after Installation of Technical Usage Retail
A verification of your own component version can be evaluated by logging into your SAP ERP ABAPsystem and choosing System Status in the menu The Component Information pushbutton displaysthe details In addition each software component has its own support packages which can beimported separately (for each component) or component-wide ‒ using Support Package Stacks Inthis example the software component SAP_HR is on version 605 and Support Package level 1
Figure 2 Example for Component Information
1264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
The business functions and thus the business-related features that you plan to use will dictatewhich software components you must install in your existing system instances The following figurehelps you to understand the relationship between business functions technical usages softwarecomponents and product instances
Figure 3 Example for Mapping Process Relationship Between Technical Usages Business Functionsand Software Components
n Business FunctionThe business functions in an enhancement package define the functional scope which you canactivate and use in the supported business process A business function has two meaningsl It is the business entity that provides information about process enhancements and information
about what you have to install to use those process enhancements All required businessfunctions are summarized in the technical usage
l It is the technical entity in the ABAP instance that can be switched on using the switchframework transaction (SFW5)
Example
The business function 2 New General Ledger Accounting with the technical name FIN_GL_CI_1comprises the enhancements within the new general ledger accounting functions Thisbusiness function is part of the technical usage ldquoCentral Applicationrdquo
12202010 PUBLIC 1364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Note
For SAP ERP transaction SFW5 covers the following three types of business functions
uEnterprise Extension These business functions are available for full releases of SAP ECC(up to SAP ERP 60) You use them to activate a number of industry-independent andindustry-specific applications and business processes for each business function
uEnterprise Business Functions You use these business functions to activatethe developments for the enhancement packages SAP ERP contains bothindustry-independent and industry-specific enterprise business functions
u Industry business functions These business functions contain functions that belong tothe industry enhancements introduced with SAP ERP 60You cannot activate industry business functions of an industry business functionset parallel to other industry business functions in anABAP-based systeminstanceTherefore some business function sets are available where the requirements of severalindustries are linked with one another for example the SAP Oil and Gas with theUtilitiesbusiness function set
Business functions also provide you with a test catalog which allows you to test new functionalityand its specific documentation
n Business Function Sets The business functions are grouped in business function sets in yourABAP-based ECC system There are two types of business functions setsl General Business Function Set This contains the enterprise business functions and the
Enterprise Extensions These contain functions for the standard applications of AccountingLogistics Human Capital Management and some additional industry-specific applications
l Industry Business Function Set You use this to change your clients of an ECC system overto the applications and solutions tailored for an industry This business function set coversall industry business functions that can be used for an industry solution to be implementedexclusively on one system or one instance
Recommendation
A business function set is activated when you have activated at least one of the related businessfunctions We therefore recommend that you activate the business function set when you startconfiguring your system since the required industry-specific view of your Implementation Guideis only created once you have activated the related business function
n Technical UsageA technical usage refers to a set of product instances All product instances of a technical usagehave to be installed to enable a business function For information on the mapping of the technicalusage to business functions see SAP Note 1324838
1464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Example
l The technical usage Central Application refers to the product instance SAP ECC Server which isan ABAP main instance
l The technical usage Human Capital Management refers to two different product instances thefirst one is Human Capital Management which is an ABAP main instance and the second one isSAP Portal Content which is a JAVA main instance A technical usage tells you which softwarecomponent must be installed in your SAP ERP 60 system The main instance tells youwhere to install it in the ABAP or Java part of your system The technical usage can alsoinclude content for a SAP Portal SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BImdash previously known as SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse or SAP NetWeaver BW)) or SAPNetWeaver Exchange Insfrastructure (SAP NetWeaver XI) system
n Main Instances and Software ComponentsA software component is the smallest maintainable unit within the SAP software model thus thebasis for support packages For installation purposes a software component is assigned to one orseveral product instances All content (BI EP PI content) is shipped as software components
Example
The technical usage Central Application consists of two software components in the above figureEA-APPL 605 and SAP_APPL 605 From a technical point of view both software components mustbe installed to launch the new function New General Ledger Accounting
The product instance (or main instance) comprises a set of software components
Example
The product instance in the above figure is SAP ECC Server which consists of severalapplication-specific software components such as SAP_APPL SAP_HR or EA-Retail
With enhancement packages new or enhanced objects that are contained in special contentproduct instances are shipped The following types of content are availablel Role Content provides a single pointmdashofmdashaccess for SAP business applications reports and
technologies For example it allows a seamless integration of classic SAP GUI-based transactionsand Web Dynpro-based applications There are two different options to run role content
uSAP Netweaver Business Client (NWBC)The NWBC enables you to directly access PFCGroles on the SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP
uSAP Netweaver Enterprise Portal The Enterprise Portal (EP) enables you to run portalroles which are captured in business packages The EP allows an easy integration of JAVAapplications and supports complex multi-system scenarios
12202010 PUBLIC 1564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
l Business Intelligence content (BI content mdash previously known as SAP NetWeaverBusiness Warehouse content or SAP NetWeaver BW content) In your BW system new orchanged objects as of the enhancement packages are stored in own InfoAreas
l SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure content (XI content) and enterprise servicesAs part of the enhancement packages you receive additional enterprise services Theimplementations of these enterprise services are in the software component versions of yourABAP-based system In the XI system these enterprise services are grouped in their ownsoftware components and namespaces for the enhancement packages For more informationabout these enterprise services see the documentation of the business function and therelated release notes
The following figure explains the relationship between business functions technical usage andsoftware components using the business function example HCM Administrative Services 03 You canuse this business function to get the latest functions for HCM processes and formsThe business function HCM Administrative Services 03 is mapped to the technical usage Human CapitalManagement This technical usage requires several product instances such as SAP ECC ServerSAP NW ‒ EP Core and SAP Portal Content As you can see in the figure the technical usagehighlighted in yellow is the only grouping entity stretched across different product instances
Figure 4 Software Architecture SAP ERP ‒ Example Human Capital Management BusinessFunction HCM Administrative Services HCM_ASR_CI_3
From a technical point of view you install software components SAP_HR 605 and EA_HR 605 inyour SAP ECC Server system as well as the related enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70
1664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Business packages related to HCM Administrative Services and portal content are deployed inthe Java part of the SAP NW ‒ EP core system
Industry Business Solutions
As mentioned in the previous chapter [page 9] industry business solutions have been integrated into theSAP ECC Server There are different ways to make the functionality for an industry business solutionavailable SAP ERP therefore distinguishes between the following types of industry business solutions
n Industry business solutions delivered as central component These industry businesssolutions are available immediately after the installation of the product instance SAP ECC youdo not have to activate a business function
n Industry business solutions available as business function set (industry enhancement)Youuse the business function set to activate the industry-specific functions that change your ECCsystem over to the requirements of a specific industry These business function sets are alsoavailable with SAP ECC you do not have to install an add-on
n Industry-specific business processes or industry business solutions delivered as EnterpriseExtension or Enterprise business function
n Industry business solutions delivered as add-on You have to install these industry businesssolutions separately
More Information
n Further details of the relationship between business functions technical usage product instancesand software components are visible in the mapping of business functions to technical usagesSee PDF attachment in the SAP Note 1324838
n The ldquoApplication Operation Guide for SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo containsthe component matrix for ABAP and Java components as well as for additional componentsThe guide is available at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement packages 5 for SAP ERP 60 ldquoSOG SAP enhancement packages5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo
n For more information about the different industries refer to the individual Master Guides for eachindustry You find them at httpservicesapcominstguides Note that the Master Guidesfor the industries cover industry scenarios running in the entire SAP Business Suite not justSAP ERP
n For more information on the individual business functions see wwwhelpsapcom SAP ERPSAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60) Business Functions in SAP ERP
n For more information on roles refer to SAP Note 1522708
12202010 PUBLIC 1764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
The following list summarizes important facts about the enhancement package concept andrecommended approaches
n Install only selected parts of the enhancement package The selection is driven by the functionalneed from a business point of view
n You cannot mix the installation of different enhancement package versions in your ABAP-basedSAP system You can have just one enhancement package version in the SAP system
n SAP enhancement packages are cumulative meaning that each new enhancement packageincludes new innovations of its own as well as all innovations delivered with prior packages
n We recommend installing the latest available enhancement package versionn Install enhancement packages and Support Packages in one single step (this includes the
preconditioned Support Packages)n SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the Support
Package versions of the underlying SAP systemn SAP enhancement packages have the same maintenance period as the underlying core applicationn The installation of an enhancement package is irreversible
n As long as you do not activate a business function the installation of an enhancement packagehas no impact on existing business processes or user interfacesYou can only activate business functions in ABAP-based systems not in Java-based SAP systems
n The activation of most business functions and extension sets is irreversible Only a small numberof business functions is reversibleTest the installation process and activation of new functions in advance on a sandbox systemEnsure that you evaluate the runtime and the SAP system behavior its dependencies and impactsMake sure that your SAP system is free of errors before going live
25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
This chapter provides an overview of the technical changes that are included with the latest availableenhancement package version
n Use of SAP Solution Manager ismandatory Ensure that you have installed SAP SolutionManager SP23 or higher Also ensure that you have correctly defined and maintained yoursystem landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY)As of enhancement package 5 the add-on landscape verification 10 for SAP Solution Manageris available This add-on allows you to identify issues in your SAP Solution Manager landscape(transaction SMSY) before they cause problems for example during a system update Example for
1864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
A43 Scenario and Process Component List 48A44 Using the SCLPCL 48A5 SAP Solution Manager 49A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP Solution Manager 49A6 Implementable Steps 50A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager 50
Chapter B Reference 57B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types 57
464 PUBLIC 12202010
1 Getting Started
1 Getting Started
11 Purpose of This Document
This master guide provides a central starting point for the technical implementation of theenhancement packages for SAP ERP It outlines the basic idea of the enhancement package conceptand provides an insight into the overall implementation procedure
Note
This document focuses on enhancement package 5Ensure that you use EHP5 SP03 for productive usage Any mentioning of enhancement package 5 inthis document refers to EHP5 SP03
To ensure a smooth technical implementation this guide helps you to find further information andlinks to related documents that outline business processes scenarios and software units Getting aclear picture of the implementation procedure will help you to plan and prepare all required steps ofyour project Keep inmind that additional software dependencies which are not mentioned explicitlyin the present document might exist These dependencies are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzertool available at httpservicesapcomudaFor a general overview of the available SAP documentation see The Main SAP Documentation Typesat httphelpsapcom Additional Information Docu Types In the different phases of your enhancement package implementation project different documentsand information sources support you with information We recommend to read the documents inthe following order which leads you from overview documentation to detailed documentation
n Master Guide for SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERPn SAP Business Suite 7 i2010mdash Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guiden HowmdashTo Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60n Installation Guidemdash SAP Enhancement Package Installation Using SAP ehpi
12 How to Use This Document
This Master Guide consists of the following main sectionsChapter 1 ‒ Getting Started [page 5]This chapter explains the fundamentals of this document provides an overview of the structure ofthis Master Guide and explains how to read it
12202010 PUBLIC 564
1 Getting Started13 Feedback and Comments
Chapter 2 mdash SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP [page 7]This chapter provides necessary information such as a general overview the delivery architecture andthe structure of the SAP ERP software The key facts summarize important rules and guidelinesThe chapter helps you to understand the enhancement package concept and the software componentdesign It is essential to become familiar with this so that you can set up in-depth planning for animplementation project The next milestone is to get an overview of the whole implementationprocessChapter 3 Enhancement Package Installation [page 31]Chapter 3 starts with an overview of the enhancement package implementation procedure To get aclear picture of the whole implementation and installation process the implementation steps areexplained in detail with helpful links to related informationThe Appendix [external document] provides topics like media lists or related SAP notes for yourinformation
Note
Beyond this document there are additional resources you can use for further information Theappendix also offers a chapter on additional documents [page 43] containing useful information for yourimplementation project
The appendix also provides you with an overview of generic tools for your implementation project aswell as information on the system landscape The second section of the appendix provides you withan overview of the most important documentation types at SAP
13 Feedback and Comments
SAP is interested in improving its documentation and welcomes your comments and suggestions Toshare your comments please send an email to EHP-techsapcom Please include the documenttitle and material number which can be found on the cover page
664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAPERP
21 Enhancement Package Key Concept
We have adapted our major release strategy to better fit your adoption cycle To ensure that youbenefit from new developments and innovations while minimizing the impact on your coreoperational systems SAP uses enhancement packages to speed up the delivery of new functionsWith SAP enhancement packages you can install and activate new functions depending on yourbusiness needs without having to perform a system upgradeYou can selectively implement the new functions and activate the software upon business demandAs a result you can isolate the impact of software updates and make new functions available fasterdue to shortened test cycles
Implementation
There are three different scenarios to implement an enhancement package
n Installation of an enhancement package on an existing SAP systemn New installation of an SAP system including an enhancement packagen Upgrade of an SAP system including an enhancement package
The installation process of enhancement packages consists of two different steps
n Technical installation of an enhancement packagen Activation of new functions using the switch framework technology
You have a choice on both levels ‒ installation and activation You do not need to install a fullenhancement package Instead you can update the software components that are related to thefunctional enhancements you want to useFrom a business point of view functional enhancements are grouped into business functions (BFs)The technical installation of the business functions does not change the system behavior The newfunctions are available in the system but are not active After the installation no user interface orprocess change takes place You must explicitly activate new functions so that they become visiblein the system As a result changes are predictable and there are no side effects as only the activatedareas changeWith the switch framework technology (transaction SFW5) it is possible to control the activation ofnew SAP objects in ABAP-based SAP systems The activation process triggers a background job thatautomatically performs all changes in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP21 Enhancement Package Key Concept
Caution
You cannot reverse most business function once they are activated Due to technical restrictionsonly a limited number of business functions are reversible
After you have activated a business function you can see the changes and new developments inthe SAP system for example
n Menu entries
n New screens
n New fields on the application user interfacesn IMG activities required for the implementationn New table entries in Customizing tables and system tables
You can create a transport request with the current settings of the switch framework You cancheck functional changes and the impact of an activated business function in advance in the businessfunction documentation
Recommendation
Test the installation and activation on a sandbox system
Maintenance
SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the SupportPackage versions of the underlying SAP system We highly recommend installing the enhancementpackage in combination with the latest available Support Package stack This approach reducesinstallation modification adjustment and testing effort Using this strategy you can install SAPenhancement packages as a normal maintenance activity together with Support Package stacksAn enhancement package requires a specific Support Package stack level in the source release SAPsystem If the SAP system is on a lower Support Package stack level all relevant Support Packagestacks are automatically included into the download queue as well as the latest available SupportPackages for the enhancement package
Tools
The enhancement package installation requires the following tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizern Installation or upgrade tools (depending on your scenario)
The SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (accessible from the Change Management workcenter) supports the download of a consistent queue that includes all necessary Support Packagesand enhancement packages In addition SAP Solution Manager calculates a valid import queue forthe selected SAP system and generates the enhancement package stack configuration file that yourequire for the installation
864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
For the new installation of an SAP system including enhancement package as well as for the upgradeof an SAP system to a higher release including an enhancement package you use the standardinstallation and upgrade tools (SAPinst SAPup and SAPJup) To install an enhancement packageon an existing SAP system you use the SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) It allowsenhancement packages to be installed with reduced downtime SAPehpi uses the shadow systeminstallation strategy a well-known feature in the upgrade technology
22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
Understanding the architecture of SAP ERP software is key to understanding the enhancementpackage concept This short summary provides an overview of the software components that arerelevant to SAP ERP 60 from an application and industry point of viewSAP ERP 60 is based on SAP NetWeaver 70 and consists of different product instances and softwarecomponents (see Chapter 23 [page 11]) Each of them represents a particular functional piece of thesoftware The following table gives an overview of the SAP ERP 60 software components
ABAP Components
SAP ECC 60 Add-Ons ABAP BI Content SAP SRM
EA-APPL 600 INSURANCE 600 cPROJECT SUITE40
BI Content 702 SAP SRM 50 Server
EA-FINSERV 600 IS-CWM 600 SAP CATALOG 20
EA-GLTRADE 600 IS-H 600 WFMCORE 20
EA-HR 600 IS-M 600
EA-IPPE 400 IS-OIL 600
EA-PS 600 IS-PS-CA 600
EA-RETAIL 600 IS-UT 600
ECC-DIMP 600 SAP AP 70
ES-DFPS 600 SAP-APPL 600
FI-CA 600 SAP-HR 600
FI-CAX 600 ST-PI
ERECRUIT 600 LSO (FE) 600
FINBASIS 600 SEM BW 600
JAVA Components
Java WebApplications
EP Content XI Content
12202010 PUBLIC 964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
BILLER DIRECT 60 Business Packages XI Content forApplications
LSO (CP) 600 ELSTER 20
SAP XSS 60
XECO 50
Additional Components
SAP SolutionManager
Front End
LSO (AE) 600 SAP Easy DocumentManagement 60
LSO (OP) 600 SAP GUI 620640
cProject ECL Viewer512
SEM FrontendComponents
Open PS for MSProject 202
BIBW FrontendComponents
The ABAP software units of SAP ECC 60 and the SAP SRM Server are part of SAP ERP 60 Thesoftware component BI Content includes the content that is required to install product instance ldquoSAPNW - Business Intelligencerdquo You need to install this content as wellSome other examples of product instances are
n SAP NW ‒ EP Core
n SAP NW ‒ Application Server Javan SAP XSS (Self-Services)n SAP SRM - Server
Java components include the general Java Web applications such as SAP XSS on the one hand andcontent packages on the other hand The content packages are available for the product instancesSAP NetWeaver - EP Core and SAP NetWeaver ‒ Process Integration (PI) The content is installed inaddition to product instance SAP NetWeaver - EP Core or product instance SAP NetWeaver - ProcessIntegration (PI)The software components of SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC 60 product instance SAPECC Server) shown in this figure cannot be installed individually they are always installed as oneinstance Nevertheless support packages for each subcomponent are available Therefore you canpatch each required subcomponent separatelyThe components included with the Java Web Applications are independent J2EE componentscombined in one single installation tool as product instance SAP XECO Therefore if you want toinstall one or more of these components you need the ERP Java Components installation which isperformed by SAPinst
1064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
With SAP ERP you also receive a series of industry business solutions that were formerly delivered asIndustry Solution Add-Ons These add-ons have been integrated into the product instance SAP ECCServer The following industry business solutions are available with SAP ECC 60
n SAP Catch Weight Managementn Defense Forces amp Public Securityn SAP Discrete Industries and Mill Products
n SAP HealthcareSAP Ambulatory Care Managementn SAP for Insurance
n SAP Media
n SAP Miningn SAP Oil amp Gas
n Collection and Disbursement (PSCD)n SAP Retail
n Campus Managementn SAP Telecommunications
n SAP Utilities
n Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
You can use many of the industry business solutions by activating the corresponding businessfunctions and business function sets You use them to configure your ECC system to therequirements of the industry business solution To find out which business industry solutions youcan use refer to the Product Availability Matrix at httpservicesapcompamFor more information on the different types of industry business solutions see Enhancement Packages andSoftware Components Architecture Overview [page 11]
More InformationFor more information about the SAP ERP 60 technology or about the architecture of theSwitch Framework see the ldquoMaster Guide for SAP ERP 60rdquo on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomerp-instImportant SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 see SAPNote 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
23 Enhancement Packages and Software ComponentsArchitecture Overview
Prior to the availability of the enhancement package delivery architecture it was necessary to upgradethe complete SAP system instance to a new release for example from SAP R3 46C to SAP ERP 60With enhancement packages it is now possible to update individual software components of your
12202010 PUBLIC 1164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
SAP ERP system or to install new software components always based on your choice of technicalusage For example with technical usage ldquoHuman Capital Managementrdquo you can update SAP ERP 60software component SAP_HR 600 and EA-HR 600 to SAP_HR 605 and EA-HR 605
Note
Update only software components that are related to the functions you want to use
SAP ERP 60 ECC Server consists of two different types of software components
n Application-related software components such as SAP_APPL or SAP_HRn SAP NetWeaver-related software components such as SAP_BASIS or SAP_ABA
In this example the application components in the following figure have version 600 (for exampleEA-HR 600) and the Basis (NetWeaver) components have version 700 which is the given situationwith SAP ERP 60 without any enhancement packages After installation of the technical usage Retailselected software components of the application area have been updated to a higher version such asSAP_APPL 605 EA-Retail 605 as well as the NetWeaver component to version 702
Figure 1 Application Components after Installation of Technical Usage Retail
A verification of your own component version can be evaluated by logging into your SAP ERP ABAPsystem and choosing System Status in the menu The Component Information pushbutton displaysthe details In addition each software component has its own support packages which can beimported separately (for each component) or component-wide ‒ using Support Package Stacks Inthis example the software component SAP_HR is on version 605 and Support Package level 1
Figure 2 Example for Component Information
1264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
The business functions and thus the business-related features that you plan to use will dictatewhich software components you must install in your existing system instances The following figurehelps you to understand the relationship between business functions technical usages softwarecomponents and product instances
Figure 3 Example for Mapping Process Relationship Between Technical Usages Business Functionsand Software Components
n Business FunctionThe business functions in an enhancement package define the functional scope which you canactivate and use in the supported business process A business function has two meaningsl It is the business entity that provides information about process enhancements and information
about what you have to install to use those process enhancements All required businessfunctions are summarized in the technical usage
l It is the technical entity in the ABAP instance that can be switched on using the switchframework transaction (SFW5)
Example
The business function 2 New General Ledger Accounting with the technical name FIN_GL_CI_1comprises the enhancements within the new general ledger accounting functions Thisbusiness function is part of the technical usage ldquoCentral Applicationrdquo
12202010 PUBLIC 1364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Note
For SAP ERP transaction SFW5 covers the following three types of business functions
uEnterprise Extension These business functions are available for full releases of SAP ECC(up to SAP ERP 60) You use them to activate a number of industry-independent andindustry-specific applications and business processes for each business function
uEnterprise Business Functions You use these business functions to activatethe developments for the enhancement packages SAP ERP contains bothindustry-independent and industry-specific enterprise business functions
u Industry business functions These business functions contain functions that belong tothe industry enhancements introduced with SAP ERP 60You cannot activate industry business functions of an industry business functionset parallel to other industry business functions in anABAP-based systeminstanceTherefore some business function sets are available where the requirements of severalindustries are linked with one another for example the SAP Oil and Gas with theUtilitiesbusiness function set
Business functions also provide you with a test catalog which allows you to test new functionalityand its specific documentation
n Business Function Sets The business functions are grouped in business function sets in yourABAP-based ECC system There are two types of business functions setsl General Business Function Set This contains the enterprise business functions and the
Enterprise Extensions These contain functions for the standard applications of AccountingLogistics Human Capital Management and some additional industry-specific applications
l Industry Business Function Set You use this to change your clients of an ECC system overto the applications and solutions tailored for an industry This business function set coversall industry business functions that can be used for an industry solution to be implementedexclusively on one system or one instance
Recommendation
A business function set is activated when you have activated at least one of the related businessfunctions We therefore recommend that you activate the business function set when you startconfiguring your system since the required industry-specific view of your Implementation Guideis only created once you have activated the related business function
n Technical UsageA technical usage refers to a set of product instances All product instances of a technical usagehave to be installed to enable a business function For information on the mapping of the technicalusage to business functions see SAP Note 1324838
1464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Example
l The technical usage Central Application refers to the product instance SAP ECC Server which isan ABAP main instance
l The technical usage Human Capital Management refers to two different product instances thefirst one is Human Capital Management which is an ABAP main instance and the second one isSAP Portal Content which is a JAVA main instance A technical usage tells you which softwarecomponent must be installed in your SAP ERP 60 system The main instance tells youwhere to install it in the ABAP or Java part of your system The technical usage can alsoinclude content for a SAP Portal SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BImdash previously known as SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse or SAP NetWeaver BW)) or SAPNetWeaver Exchange Insfrastructure (SAP NetWeaver XI) system
n Main Instances and Software ComponentsA software component is the smallest maintainable unit within the SAP software model thus thebasis for support packages For installation purposes a software component is assigned to one orseveral product instances All content (BI EP PI content) is shipped as software components
Example
The technical usage Central Application consists of two software components in the above figureEA-APPL 605 and SAP_APPL 605 From a technical point of view both software components mustbe installed to launch the new function New General Ledger Accounting
The product instance (or main instance) comprises a set of software components
Example
The product instance in the above figure is SAP ECC Server which consists of severalapplication-specific software components such as SAP_APPL SAP_HR or EA-Retail
With enhancement packages new or enhanced objects that are contained in special contentproduct instances are shipped The following types of content are availablel Role Content provides a single pointmdashofmdashaccess for SAP business applications reports and
technologies For example it allows a seamless integration of classic SAP GUI-based transactionsand Web Dynpro-based applications There are two different options to run role content
uSAP Netweaver Business Client (NWBC)The NWBC enables you to directly access PFCGroles on the SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP
uSAP Netweaver Enterprise Portal The Enterprise Portal (EP) enables you to run portalroles which are captured in business packages The EP allows an easy integration of JAVAapplications and supports complex multi-system scenarios
12202010 PUBLIC 1564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
l Business Intelligence content (BI content mdash previously known as SAP NetWeaverBusiness Warehouse content or SAP NetWeaver BW content) In your BW system new orchanged objects as of the enhancement packages are stored in own InfoAreas
l SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure content (XI content) and enterprise servicesAs part of the enhancement packages you receive additional enterprise services Theimplementations of these enterprise services are in the software component versions of yourABAP-based system In the XI system these enterprise services are grouped in their ownsoftware components and namespaces for the enhancement packages For more informationabout these enterprise services see the documentation of the business function and therelated release notes
The following figure explains the relationship between business functions technical usage andsoftware components using the business function example HCM Administrative Services 03 You canuse this business function to get the latest functions for HCM processes and formsThe business function HCM Administrative Services 03 is mapped to the technical usage Human CapitalManagement This technical usage requires several product instances such as SAP ECC ServerSAP NW ‒ EP Core and SAP Portal Content As you can see in the figure the technical usagehighlighted in yellow is the only grouping entity stretched across different product instances
Figure 4 Software Architecture SAP ERP ‒ Example Human Capital Management BusinessFunction HCM Administrative Services HCM_ASR_CI_3
From a technical point of view you install software components SAP_HR 605 and EA_HR 605 inyour SAP ECC Server system as well as the related enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70
1664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Business packages related to HCM Administrative Services and portal content are deployed inthe Java part of the SAP NW ‒ EP core system
Industry Business Solutions
As mentioned in the previous chapter [page 9] industry business solutions have been integrated into theSAP ECC Server There are different ways to make the functionality for an industry business solutionavailable SAP ERP therefore distinguishes between the following types of industry business solutions
n Industry business solutions delivered as central component These industry businesssolutions are available immediately after the installation of the product instance SAP ECC youdo not have to activate a business function
n Industry business solutions available as business function set (industry enhancement)Youuse the business function set to activate the industry-specific functions that change your ECCsystem over to the requirements of a specific industry These business function sets are alsoavailable with SAP ECC you do not have to install an add-on
n Industry-specific business processes or industry business solutions delivered as EnterpriseExtension or Enterprise business function
n Industry business solutions delivered as add-on You have to install these industry businesssolutions separately
More Information
n Further details of the relationship between business functions technical usage product instancesand software components are visible in the mapping of business functions to technical usagesSee PDF attachment in the SAP Note 1324838
n The ldquoApplication Operation Guide for SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo containsthe component matrix for ABAP and Java components as well as for additional componentsThe guide is available at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement packages 5 for SAP ERP 60 ldquoSOG SAP enhancement packages5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo
n For more information about the different industries refer to the individual Master Guides for eachindustry You find them at httpservicesapcominstguides Note that the Master Guidesfor the industries cover industry scenarios running in the entire SAP Business Suite not justSAP ERP
n For more information on the individual business functions see wwwhelpsapcom SAP ERPSAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60) Business Functions in SAP ERP
n For more information on roles refer to SAP Note 1522708
12202010 PUBLIC 1764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
The following list summarizes important facts about the enhancement package concept andrecommended approaches
n Install only selected parts of the enhancement package The selection is driven by the functionalneed from a business point of view
n You cannot mix the installation of different enhancement package versions in your ABAP-basedSAP system You can have just one enhancement package version in the SAP system
n SAP enhancement packages are cumulative meaning that each new enhancement packageincludes new innovations of its own as well as all innovations delivered with prior packages
n We recommend installing the latest available enhancement package versionn Install enhancement packages and Support Packages in one single step (this includes the
preconditioned Support Packages)n SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the Support
Package versions of the underlying SAP systemn SAP enhancement packages have the same maintenance period as the underlying core applicationn The installation of an enhancement package is irreversible
n As long as you do not activate a business function the installation of an enhancement packagehas no impact on existing business processes or user interfacesYou can only activate business functions in ABAP-based systems not in Java-based SAP systems
n The activation of most business functions and extension sets is irreversible Only a small numberof business functions is reversibleTest the installation process and activation of new functions in advance on a sandbox systemEnsure that you evaluate the runtime and the SAP system behavior its dependencies and impactsMake sure that your SAP system is free of errors before going live
25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
This chapter provides an overview of the technical changes that are included with the latest availableenhancement package version
n Use of SAP Solution Manager ismandatory Ensure that you have installed SAP SolutionManager SP23 or higher Also ensure that you have correctly defined and maintained yoursystem landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY)As of enhancement package 5 the add-on landscape verification 10 for SAP Solution Manageris available This add-on allows you to identify issues in your SAP Solution Manager landscape(transaction SMSY) before they cause problems for example during a system update Example for
1864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
1 Getting Started
1 Getting Started
11 Purpose of This Document
This master guide provides a central starting point for the technical implementation of theenhancement packages for SAP ERP It outlines the basic idea of the enhancement package conceptand provides an insight into the overall implementation procedure
Note
This document focuses on enhancement package 5Ensure that you use EHP5 SP03 for productive usage Any mentioning of enhancement package 5 inthis document refers to EHP5 SP03
To ensure a smooth technical implementation this guide helps you to find further information andlinks to related documents that outline business processes scenarios and software units Getting aclear picture of the implementation procedure will help you to plan and prepare all required steps ofyour project Keep inmind that additional software dependencies which are not mentioned explicitlyin the present document might exist These dependencies are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzertool available at httpservicesapcomudaFor a general overview of the available SAP documentation see The Main SAP Documentation Typesat httphelpsapcom Additional Information Docu Types In the different phases of your enhancement package implementation project different documentsand information sources support you with information We recommend to read the documents inthe following order which leads you from overview documentation to detailed documentation
n Master Guide for SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERPn SAP Business Suite 7 i2010mdash Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guiden HowmdashTo Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60n Installation Guidemdash SAP Enhancement Package Installation Using SAP ehpi
12 How to Use This Document
This Master Guide consists of the following main sectionsChapter 1 ‒ Getting Started [page 5]This chapter explains the fundamentals of this document provides an overview of the structure ofthis Master Guide and explains how to read it
12202010 PUBLIC 564
1 Getting Started13 Feedback and Comments
Chapter 2 mdash SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP [page 7]This chapter provides necessary information such as a general overview the delivery architecture andthe structure of the SAP ERP software The key facts summarize important rules and guidelinesThe chapter helps you to understand the enhancement package concept and the software componentdesign It is essential to become familiar with this so that you can set up in-depth planning for animplementation project The next milestone is to get an overview of the whole implementationprocessChapter 3 Enhancement Package Installation [page 31]Chapter 3 starts with an overview of the enhancement package implementation procedure To get aclear picture of the whole implementation and installation process the implementation steps areexplained in detail with helpful links to related informationThe Appendix [external document] provides topics like media lists or related SAP notes for yourinformation
Note
Beyond this document there are additional resources you can use for further information Theappendix also offers a chapter on additional documents [page 43] containing useful information for yourimplementation project
The appendix also provides you with an overview of generic tools for your implementation project aswell as information on the system landscape The second section of the appendix provides you withan overview of the most important documentation types at SAP
13 Feedback and Comments
SAP is interested in improving its documentation and welcomes your comments and suggestions Toshare your comments please send an email to EHP-techsapcom Please include the documenttitle and material number which can be found on the cover page
664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAPERP
21 Enhancement Package Key Concept
We have adapted our major release strategy to better fit your adoption cycle To ensure that youbenefit from new developments and innovations while minimizing the impact on your coreoperational systems SAP uses enhancement packages to speed up the delivery of new functionsWith SAP enhancement packages you can install and activate new functions depending on yourbusiness needs without having to perform a system upgradeYou can selectively implement the new functions and activate the software upon business demandAs a result you can isolate the impact of software updates and make new functions available fasterdue to shortened test cycles
Implementation
There are three different scenarios to implement an enhancement package
n Installation of an enhancement package on an existing SAP systemn New installation of an SAP system including an enhancement packagen Upgrade of an SAP system including an enhancement package
The installation process of enhancement packages consists of two different steps
n Technical installation of an enhancement packagen Activation of new functions using the switch framework technology
You have a choice on both levels ‒ installation and activation You do not need to install a fullenhancement package Instead you can update the software components that are related to thefunctional enhancements you want to useFrom a business point of view functional enhancements are grouped into business functions (BFs)The technical installation of the business functions does not change the system behavior The newfunctions are available in the system but are not active After the installation no user interface orprocess change takes place You must explicitly activate new functions so that they become visiblein the system As a result changes are predictable and there are no side effects as only the activatedareas changeWith the switch framework technology (transaction SFW5) it is possible to control the activation ofnew SAP objects in ABAP-based SAP systems The activation process triggers a background job thatautomatically performs all changes in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP21 Enhancement Package Key Concept
Caution
You cannot reverse most business function once they are activated Due to technical restrictionsonly a limited number of business functions are reversible
After you have activated a business function you can see the changes and new developments inthe SAP system for example
n Menu entries
n New screens
n New fields on the application user interfacesn IMG activities required for the implementationn New table entries in Customizing tables and system tables
You can create a transport request with the current settings of the switch framework You cancheck functional changes and the impact of an activated business function in advance in the businessfunction documentation
Recommendation
Test the installation and activation on a sandbox system
Maintenance
SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the SupportPackage versions of the underlying SAP system We highly recommend installing the enhancementpackage in combination with the latest available Support Package stack This approach reducesinstallation modification adjustment and testing effort Using this strategy you can install SAPenhancement packages as a normal maintenance activity together with Support Package stacksAn enhancement package requires a specific Support Package stack level in the source release SAPsystem If the SAP system is on a lower Support Package stack level all relevant Support Packagestacks are automatically included into the download queue as well as the latest available SupportPackages for the enhancement package
Tools
The enhancement package installation requires the following tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizern Installation or upgrade tools (depending on your scenario)
The SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (accessible from the Change Management workcenter) supports the download of a consistent queue that includes all necessary Support Packagesand enhancement packages In addition SAP Solution Manager calculates a valid import queue forthe selected SAP system and generates the enhancement package stack configuration file that yourequire for the installation
864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
For the new installation of an SAP system including enhancement package as well as for the upgradeof an SAP system to a higher release including an enhancement package you use the standardinstallation and upgrade tools (SAPinst SAPup and SAPJup) To install an enhancement packageon an existing SAP system you use the SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) It allowsenhancement packages to be installed with reduced downtime SAPehpi uses the shadow systeminstallation strategy a well-known feature in the upgrade technology
22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
Understanding the architecture of SAP ERP software is key to understanding the enhancementpackage concept This short summary provides an overview of the software components that arerelevant to SAP ERP 60 from an application and industry point of viewSAP ERP 60 is based on SAP NetWeaver 70 and consists of different product instances and softwarecomponents (see Chapter 23 [page 11]) Each of them represents a particular functional piece of thesoftware The following table gives an overview of the SAP ERP 60 software components
ABAP Components
SAP ECC 60 Add-Ons ABAP BI Content SAP SRM
EA-APPL 600 INSURANCE 600 cPROJECT SUITE40
BI Content 702 SAP SRM 50 Server
EA-FINSERV 600 IS-CWM 600 SAP CATALOG 20
EA-GLTRADE 600 IS-H 600 WFMCORE 20
EA-HR 600 IS-M 600
EA-IPPE 400 IS-OIL 600
EA-PS 600 IS-PS-CA 600
EA-RETAIL 600 IS-UT 600
ECC-DIMP 600 SAP AP 70
ES-DFPS 600 SAP-APPL 600
FI-CA 600 SAP-HR 600
FI-CAX 600 ST-PI
ERECRUIT 600 LSO (FE) 600
FINBASIS 600 SEM BW 600
JAVA Components
Java WebApplications
EP Content XI Content
12202010 PUBLIC 964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
BILLER DIRECT 60 Business Packages XI Content forApplications
LSO (CP) 600 ELSTER 20
SAP XSS 60
XECO 50
Additional Components
SAP SolutionManager
Front End
LSO (AE) 600 SAP Easy DocumentManagement 60
LSO (OP) 600 SAP GUI 620640
cProject ECL Viewer512
SEM FrontendComponents
Open PS for MSProject 202
BIBW FrontendComponents
The ABAP software units of SAP ECC 60 and the SAP SRM Server are part of SAP ERP 60 Thesoftware component BI Content includes the content that is required to install product instance ldquoSAPNW - Business Intelligencerdquo You need to install this content as wellSome other examples of product instances are
n SAP NW ‒ EP Core
n SAP NW ‒ Application Server Javan SAP XSS (Self-Services)n SAP SRM - Server
Java components include the general Java Web applications such as SAP XSS on the one hand andcontent packages on the other hand The content packages are available for the product instancesSAP NetWeaver - EP Core and SAP NetWeaver ‒ Process Integration (PI) The content is installed inaddition to product instance SAP NetWeaver - EP Core or product instance SAP NetWeaver - ProcessIntegration (PI)The software components of SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC 60 product instance SAPECC Server) shown in this figure cannot be installed individually they are always installed as oneinstance Nevertheless support packages for each subcomponent are available Therefore you canpatch each required subcomponent separatelyThe components included with the Java Web Applications are independent J2EE componentscombined in one single installation tool as product instance SAP XECO Therefore if you want toinstall one or more of these components you need the ERP Java Components installation which isperformed by SAPinst
1064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
With SAP ERP you also receive a series of industry business solutions that were formerly delivered asIndustry Solution Add-Ons These add-ons have been integrated into the product instance SAP ECCServer The following industry business solutions are available with SAP ECC 60
n SAP Catch Weight Managementn Defense Forces amp Public Securityn SAP Discrete Industries and Mill Products
n SAP HealthcareSAP Ambulatory Care Managementn SAP for Insurance
n SAP Media
n SAP Miningn SAP Oil amp Gas
n Collection and Disbursement (PSCD)n SAP Retail
n Campus Managementn SAP Telecommunications
n SAP Utilities
n Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
You can use many of the industry business solutions by activating the corresponding businessfunctions and business function sets You use them to configure your ECC system to therequirements of the industry business solution To find out which business industry solutions youcan use refer to the Product Availability Matrix at httpservicesapcompamFor more information on the different types of industry business solutions see Enhancement Packages andSoftware Components Architecture Overview [page 11]
More InformationFor more information about the SAP ERP 60 technology or about the architecture of theSwitch Framework see the ldquoMaster Guide for SAP ERP 60rdquo on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomerp-instImportant SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 see SAPNote 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
23 Enhancement Packages and Software ComponentsArchitecture Overview
Prior to the availability of the enhancement package delivery architecture it was necessary to upgradethe complete SAP system instance to a new release for example from SAP R3 46C to SAP ERP 60With enhancement packages it is now possible to update individual software components of your
12202010 PUBLIC 1164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
SAP ERP system or to install new software components always based on your choice of technicalusage For example with technical usage ldquoHuman Capital Managementrdquo you can update SAP ERP 60software component SAP_HR 600 and EA-HR 600 to SAP_HR 605 and EA-HR 605
Note
Update only software components that are related to the functions you want to use
SAP ERP 60 ECC Server consists of two different types of software components
n Application-related software components such as SAP_APPL or SAP_HRn SAP NetWeaver-related software components such as SAP_BASIS or SAP_ABA
In this example the application components in the following figure have version 600 (for exampleEA-HR 600) and the Basis (NetWeaver) components have version 700 which is the given situationwith SAP ERP 60 without any enhancement packages After installation of the technical usage Retailselected software components of the application area have been updated to a higher version such asSAP_APPL 605 EA-Retail 605 as well as the NetWeaver component to version 702
Figure 1 Application Components after Installation of Technical Usage Retail
A verification of your own component version can be evaluated by logging into your SAP ERP ABAPsystem and choosing System Status in the menu The Component Information pushbutton displaysthe details In addition each software component has its own support packages which can beimported separately (for each component) or component-wide ‒ using Support Package Stacks Inthis example the software component SAP_HR is on version 605 and Support Package level 1
Figure 2 Example for Component Information
1264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
The business functions and thus the business-related features that you plan to use will dictatewhich software components you must install in your existing system instances The following figurehelps you to understand the relationship between business functions technical usages softwarecomponents and product instances
Figure 3 Example for Mapping Process Relationship Between Technical Usages Business Functionsand Software Components
n Business FunctionThe business functions in an enhancement package define the functional scope which you canactivate and use in the supported business process A business function has two meaningsl It is the business entity that provides information about process enhancements and information
about what you have to install to use those process enhancements All required businessfunctions are summarized in the technical usage
l It is the technical entity in the ABAP instance that can be switched on using the switchframework transaction (SFW5)
Example
The business function 2 New General Ledger Accounting with the technical name FIN_GL_CI_1comprises the enhancements within the new general ledger accounting functions Thisbusiness function is part of the technical usage ldquoCentral Applicationrdquo
12202010 PUBLIC 1364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Note
For SAP ERP transaction SFW5 covers the following three types of business functions
uEnterprise Extension These business functions are available for full releases of SAP ECC(up to SAP ERP 60) You use them to activate a number of industry-independent andindustry-specific applications and business processes for each business function
uEnterprise Business Functions You use these business functions to activatethe developments for the enhancement packages SAP ERP contains bothindustry-independent and industry-specific enterprise business functions
u Industry business functions These business functions contain functions that belong tothe industry enhancements introduced with SAP ERP 60You cannot activate industry business functions of an industry business functionset parallel to other industry business functions in anABAP-based systeminstanceTherefore some business function sets are available where the requirements of severalindustries are linked with one another for example the SAP Oil and Gas with theUtilitiesbusiness function set
Business functions also provide you with a test catalog which allows you to test new functionalityand its specific documentation
n Business Function Sets The business functions are grouped in business function sets in yourABAP-based ECC system There are two types of business functions setsl General Business Function Set This contains the enterprise business functions and the
Enterprise Extensions These contain functions for the standard applications of AccountingLogistics Human Capital Management and some additional industry-specific applications
l Industry Business Function Set You use this to change your clients of an ECC system overto the applications and solutions tailored for an industry This business function set coversall industry business functions that can be used for an industry solution to be implementedexclusively on one system or one instance
Recommendation
A business function set is activated when you have activated at least one of the related businessfunctions We therefore recommend that you activate the business function set when you startconfiguring your system since the required industry-specific view of your Implementation Guideis only created once you have activated the related business function
n Technical UsageA technical usage refers to a set of product instances All product instances of a technical usagehave to be installed to enable a business function For information on the mapping of the technicalusage to business functions see SAP Note 1324838
1464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Example
l The technical usage Central Application refers to the product instance SAP ECC Server which isan ABAP main instance
l The technical usage Human Capital Management refers to two different product instances thefirst one is Human Capital Management which is an ABAP main instance and the second one isSAP Portal Content which is a JAVA main instance A technical usage tells you which softwarecomponent must be installed in your SAP ERP 60 system The main instance tells youwhere to install it in the ABAP or Java part of your system The technical usage can alsoinclude content for a SAP Portal SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BImdash previously known as SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse or SAP NetWeaver BW)) or SAPNetWeaver Exchange Insfrastructure (SAP NetWeaver XI) system
n Main Instances and Software ComponentsA software component is the smallest maintainable unit within the SAP software model thus thebasis for support packages For installation purposes a software component is assigned to one orseveral product instances All content (BI EP PI content) is shipped as software components
Example
The technical usage Central Application consists of two software components in the above figureEA-APPL 605 and SAP_APPL 605 From a technical point of view both software components mustbe installed to launch the new function New General Ledger Accounting
The product instance (or main instance) comprises a set of software components
Example
The product instance in the above figure is SAP ECC Server which consists of severalapplication-specific software components such as SAP_APPL SAP_HR or EA-Retail
With enhancement packages new or enhanced objects that are contained in special contentproduct instances are shipped The following types of content are availablel Role Content provides a single pointmdashofmdashaccess for SAP business applications reports and
technologies For example it allows a seamless integration of classic SAP GUI-based transactionsand Web Dynpro-based applications There are two different options to run role content
uSAP Netweaver Business Client (NWBC)The NWBC enables you to directly access PFCGroles on the SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP
uSAP Netweaver Enterprise Portal The Enterprise Portal (EP) enables you to run portalroles which are captured in business packages The EP allows an easy integration of JAVAapplications and supports complex multi-system scenarios
12202010 PUBLIC 1564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
l Business Intelligence content (BI content mdash previously known as SAP NetWeaverBusiness Warehouse content or SAP NetWeaver BW content) In your BW system new orchanged objects as of the enhancement packages are stored in own InfoAreas
l SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure content (XI content) and enterprise servicesAs part of the enhancement packages you receive additional enterprise services Theimplementations of these enterprise services are in the software component versions of yourABAP-based system In the XI system these enterprise services are grouped in their ownsoftware components and namespaces for the enhancement packages For more informationabout these enterprise services see the documentation of the business function and therelated release notes
The following figure explains the relationship between business functions technical usage andsoftware components using the business function example HCM Administrative Services 03 You canuse this business function to get the latest functions for HCM processes and formsThe business function HCM Administrative Services 03 is mapped to the technical usage Human CapitalManagement This technical usage requires several product instances such as SAP ECC ServerSAP NW ‒ EP Core and SAP Portal Content As you can see in the figure the technical usagehighlighted in yellow is the only grouping entity stretched across different product instances
Figure 4 Software Architecture SAP ERP ‒ Example Human Capital Management BusinessFunction HCM Administrative Services HCM_ASR_CI_3
From a technical point of view you install software components SAP_HR 605 and EA_HR 605 inyour SAP ECC Server system as well as the related enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70
1664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Business packages related to HCM Administrative Services and portal content are deployed inthe Java part of the SAP NW ‒ EP core system
Industry Business Solutions
As mentioned in the previous chapter [page 9] industry business solutions have been integrated into theSAP ECC Server There are different ways to make the functionality for an industry business solutionavailable SAP ERP therefore distinguishes between the following types of industry business solutions
n Industry business solutions delivered as central component These industry businesssolutions are available immediately after the installation of the product instance SAP ECC youdo not have to activate a business function
n Industry business solutions available as business function set (industry enhancement)Youuse the business function set to activate the industry-specific functions that change your ECCsystem over to the requirements of a specific industry These business function sets are alsoavailable with SAP ECC you do not have to install an add-on
n Industry-specific business processes or industry business solutions delivered as EnterpriseExtension or Enterprise business function
n Industry business solutions delivered as add-on You have to install these industry businesssolutions separately
More Information
n Further details of the relationship between business functions technical usage product instancesand software components are visible in the mapping of business functions to technical usagesSee PDF attachment in the SAP Note 1324838
n The ldquoApplication Operation Guide for SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo containsthe component matrix for ABAP and Java components as well as for additional componentsThe guide is available at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement packages 5 for SAP ERP 60 ldquoSOG SAP enhancement packages5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo
n For more information about the different industries refer to the individual Master Guides for eachindustry You find them at httpservicesapcominstguides Note that the Master Guidesfor the industries cover industry scenarios running in the entire SAP Business Suite not justSAP ERP
n For more information on the individual business functions see wwwhelpsapcom SAP ERPSAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60) Business Functions in SAP ERP
n For more information on roles refer to SAP Note 1522708
12202010 PUBLIC 1764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
The following list summarizes important facts about the enhancement package concept andrecommended approaches
n Install only selected parts of the enhancement package The selection is driven by the functionalneed from a business point of view
n You cannot mix the installation of different enhancement package versions in your ABAP-basedSAP system You can have just one enhancement package version in the SAP system
n SAP enhancement packages are cumulative meaning that each new enhancement packageincludes new innovations of its own as well as all innovations delivered with prior packages
n We recommend installing the latest available enhancement package versionn Install enhancement packages and Support Packages in one single step (this includes the
preconditioned Support Packages)n SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the Support
Package versions of the underlying SAP systemn SAP enhancement packages have the same maintenance period as the underlying core applicationn The installation of an enhancement package is irreversible
n As long as you do not activate a business function the installation of an enhancement packagehas no impact on existing business processes or user interfacesYou can only activate business functions in ABAP-based systems not in Java-based SAP systems
n The activation of most business functions and extension sets is irreversible Only a small numberof business functions is reversibleTest the installation process and activation of new functions in advance on a sandbox systemEnsure that you evaluate the runtime and the SAP system behavior its dependencies and impactsMake sure that your SAP system is free of errors before going live
25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
This chapter provides an overview of the technical changes that are included with the latest availableenhancement package version
n Use of SAP Solution Manager ismandatory Ensure that you have installed SAP SolutionManager SP23 or higher Also ensure that you have correctly defined and maintained yoursystem landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY)As of enhancement package 5 the add-on landscape verification 10 for SAP Solution Manageris available This add-on allows you to identify issues in your SAP Solution Manager landscape(transaction SMSY) before they cause problems for example during a system update Example for
1864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
1 Getting Started13 Feedback and Comments
Chapter 2 mdash SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP [page 7]This chapter provides necessary information such as a general overview the delivery architecture andthe structure of the SAP ERP software The key facts summarize important rules and guidelinesThe chapter helps you to understand the enhancement package concept and the software componentdesign It is essential to become familiar with this so that you can set up in-depth planning for animplementation project The next milestone is to get an overview of the whole implementationprocessChapter 3 Enhancement Package Installation [page 31]Chapter 3 starts with an overview of the enhancement package implementation procedure To get aclear picture of the whole implementation and installation process the implementation steps areexplained in detail with helpful links to related informationThe Appendix [external document] provides topics like media lists or related SAP notes for yourinformation
Note
Beyond this document there are additional resources you can use for further information Theappendix also offers a chapter on additional documents [page 43] containing useful information for yourimplementation project
The appendix also provides you with an overview of generic tools for your implementation project aswell as information on the system landscape The second section of the appendix provides you withan overview of the most important documentation types at SAP
13 Feedback and Comments
SAP is interested in improving its documentation and welcomes your comments and suggestions Toshare your comments please send an email to EHP-techsapcom Please include the documenttitle and material number which can be found on the cover page
664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAPERP
21 Enhancement Package Key Concept
We have adapted our major release strategy to better fit your adoption cycle To ensure that youbenefit from new developments and innovations while minimizing the impact on your coreoperational systems SAP uses enhancement packages to speed up the delivery of new functionsWith SAP enhancement packages you can install and activate new functions depending on yourbusiness needs without having to perform a system upgradeYou can selectively implement the new functions and activate the software upon business demandAs a result you can isolate the impact of software updates and make new functions available fasterdue to shortened test cycles
Implementation
There are three different scenarios to implement an enhancement package
n Installation of an enhancement package on an existing SAP systemn New installation of an SAP system including an enhancement packagen Upgrade of an SAP system including an enhancement package
The installation process of enhancement packages consists of two different steps
n Technical installation of an enhancement packagen Activation of new functions using the switch framework technology
You have a choice on both levels ‒ installation and activation You do not need to install a fullenhancement package Instead you can update the software components that are related to thefunctional enhancements you want to useFrom a business point of view functional enhancements are grouped into business functions (BFs)The technical installation of the business functions does not change the system behavior The newfunctions are available in the system but are not active After the installation no user interface orprocess change takes place You must explicitly activate new functions so that they become visiblein the system As a result changes are predictable and there are no side effects as only the activatedareas changeWith the switch framework technology (transaction SFW5) it is possible to control the activation ofnew SAP objects in ABAP-based SAP systems The activation process triggers a background job thatautomatically performs all changes in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP21 Enhancement Package Key Concept
Caution
You cannot reverse most business function once they are activated Due to technical restrictionsonly a limited number of business functions are reversible
After you have activated a business function you can see the changes and new developments inthe SAP system for example
n Menu entries
n New screens
n New fields on the application user interfacesn IMG activities required for the implementationn New table entries in Customizing tables and system tables
You can create a transport request with the current settings of the switch framework You cancheck functional changes and the impact of an activated business function in advance in the businessfunction documentation
Recommendation
Test the installation and activation on a sandbox system
Maintenance
SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the SupportPackage versions of the underlying SAP system We highly recommend installing the enhancementpackage in combination with the latest available Support Package stack This approach reducesinstallation modification adjustment and testing effort Using this strategy you can install SAPenhancement packages as a normal maintenance activity together with Support Package stacksAn enhancement package requires a specific Support Package stack level in the source release SAPsystem If the SAP system is on a lower Support Package stack level all relevant Support Packagestacks are automatically included into the download queue as well as the latest available SupportPackages for the enhancement package
Tools
The enhancement package installation requires the following tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizern Installation or upgrade tools (depending on your scenario)
The SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (accessible from the Change Management workcenter) supports the download of a consistent queue that includes all necessary Support Packagesand enhancement packages In addition SAP Solution Manager calculates a valid import queue forthe selected SAP system and generates the enhancement package stack configuration file that yourequire for the installation
864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
For the new installation of an SAP system including enhancement package as well as for the upgradeof an SAP system to a higher release including an enhancement package you use the standardinstallation and upgrade tools (SAPinst SAPup and SAPJup) To install an enhancement packageon an existing SAP system you use the SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) It allowsenhancement packages to be installed with reduced downtime SAPehpi uses the shadow systeminstallation strategy a well-known feature in the upgrade technology
22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
Understanding the architecture of SAP ERP software is key to understanding the enhancementpackage concept This short summary provides an overview of the software components that arerelevant to SAP ERP 60 from an application and industry point of viewSAP ERP 60 is based on SAP NetWeaver 70 and consists of different product instances and softwarecomponents (see Chapter 23 [page 11]) Each of them represents a particular functional piece of thesoftware The following table gives an overview of the SAP ERP 60 software components
ABAP Components
SAP ECC 60 Add-Ons ABAP BI Content SAP SRM
EA-APPL 600 INSURANCE 600 cPROJECT SUITE40
BI Content 702 SAP SRM 50 Server
EA-FINSERV 600 IS-CWM 600 SAP CATALOG 20
EA-GLTRADE 600 IS-H 600 WFMCORE 20
EA-HR 600 IS-M 600
EA-IPPE 400 IS-OIL 600
EA-PS 600 IS-PS-CA 600
EA-RETAIL 600 IS-UT 600
ECC-DIMP 600 SAP AP 70
ES-DFPS 600 SAP-APPL 600
FI-CA 600 SAP-HR 600
FI-CAX 600 ST-PI
ERECRUIT 600 LSO (FE) 600
FINBASIS 600 SEM BW 600
JAVA Components
Java WebApplications
EP Content XI Content
12202010 PUBLIC 964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
BILLER DIRECT 60 Business Packages XI Content forApplications
LSO (CP) 600 ELSTER 20
SAP XSS 60
XECO 50
Additional Components
SAP SolutionManager
Front End
LSO (AE) 600 SAP Easy DocumentManagement 60
LSO (OP) 600 SAP GUI 620640
cProject ECL Viewer512
SEM FrontendComponents
Open PS for MSProject 202
BIBW FrontendComponents
The ABAP software units of SAP ECC 60 and the SAP SRM Server are part of SAP ERP 60 Thesoftware component BI Content includes the content that is required to install product instance ldquoSAPNW - Business Intelligencerdquo You need to install this content as wellSome other examples of product instances are
n SAP NW ‒ EP Core
n SAP NW ‒ Application Server Javan SAP XSS (Self-Services)n SAP SRM - Server
Java components include the general Java Web applications such as SAP XSS on the one hand andcontent packages on the other hand The content packages are available for the product instancesSAP NetWeaver - EP Core and SAP NetWeaver ‒ Process Integration (PI) The content is installed inaddition to product instance SAP NetWeaver - EP Core or product instance SAP NetWeaver - ProcessIntegration (PI)The software components of SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC 60 product instance SAPECC Server) shown in this figure cannot be installed individually they are always installed as oneinstance Nevertheless support packages for each subcomponent are available Therefore you canpatch each required subcomponent separatelyThe components included with the Java Web Applications are independent J2EE componentscombined in one single installation tool as product instance SAP XECO Therefore if you want toinstall one or more of these components you need the ERP Java Components installation which isperformed by SAPinst
1064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
With SAP ERP you also receive a series of industry business solutions that were formerly delivered asIndustry Solution Add-Ons These add-ons have been integrated into the product instance SAP ECCServer The following industry business solutions are available with SAP ECC 60
n SAP Catch Weight Managementn Defense Forces amp Public Securityn SAP Discrete Industries and Mill Products
n SAP HealthcareSAP Ambulatory Care Managementn SAP for Insurance
n SAP Media
n SAP Miningn SAP Oil amp Gas
n Collection and Disbursement (PSCD)n SAP Retail
n Campus Managementn SAP Telecommunications
n SAP Utilities
n Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
You can use many of the industry business solutions by activating the corresponding businessfunctions and business function sets You use them to configure your ECC system to therequirements of the industry business solution To find out which business industry solutions youcan use refer to the Product Availability Matrix at httpservicesapcompamFor more information on the different types of industry business solutions see Enhancement Packages andSoftware Components Architecture Overview [page 11]
More InformationFor more information about the SAP ERP 60 technology or about the architecture of theSwitch Framework see the ldquoMaster Guide for SAP ERP 60rdquo on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomerp-instImportant SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 see SAPNote 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
23 Enhancement Packages and Software ComponentsArchitecture Overview
Prior to the availability of the enhancement package delivery architecture it was necessary to upgradethe complete SAP system instance to a new release for example from SAP R3 46C to SAP ERP 60With enhancement packages it is now possible to update individual software components of your
12202010 PUBLIC 1164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
SAP ERP system or to install new software components always based on your choice of technicalusage For example with technical usage ldquoHuman Capital Managementrdquo you can update SAP ERP 60software component SAP_HR 600 and EA-HR 600 to SAP_HR 605 and EA-HR 605
Note
Update only software components that are related to the functions you want to use
SAP ERP 60 ECC Server consists of two different types of software components
n Application-related software components such as SAP_APPL or SAP_HRn SAP NetWeaver-related software components such as SAP_BASIS or SAP_ABA
In this example the application components in the following figure have version 600 (for exampleEA-HR 600) and the Basis (NetWeaver) components have version 700 which is the given situationwith SAP ERP 60 without any enhancement packages After installation of the technical usage Retailselected software components of the application area have been updated to a higher version such asSAP_APPL 605 EA-Retail 605 as well as the NetWeaver component to version 702
Figure 1 Application Components after Installation of Technical Usage Retail
A verification of your own component version can be evaluated by logging into your SAP ERP ABAPsystem and choosing System Status in the menu The Component Information pushbutton displaysthe details In addition each software component has its own support packages which can beimported separately (for each component) or component-wide ‒ using Support Package Stacks Inthis example the software component SAP_HR is on version 605 and Support Package level 1
Figure 2 Example for Component Information
1264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
The business functions and thus the business-related features that you plan to use will dictatewhich software components you must install in your existing system instances The following figurehelps you to understand the relationship between business functions technical usages softwarecomponents and product instances
Figure 3 Example for Mapping Process Relationship Between Technical Usages Business Functionsand Software Components
n Business FunctionThe business functions in an enhancement package define the functional scope which you canactivate and use in the supported business process A business function has two meaningsl It is the business entity that provides information about process enhancements and information
about what you have to install to use those process enhancements All required businessfunctions are summarized in the technical usage
l It is the technical entity in the ABAP instance that can be switched on using the switchframework transaction (SFW5)
Example
The business function 2 New General Ledger Accounting with the technical name FIN_GL_CI_1comprises the enhancements within the new general ledger accounting functions Thisbusiness function is part of the technical usage ldquoCentral Applicationrdquo
12202010 PUBLIC 1364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Note
For SAP ERP transaction SFW5 covers the following three types of business functions
uEnterprise Extension These business functions are available for full releases of SAP ECC(up to SAP ERP 60) You use them to activate a number of industry-independent andindustry-specific applications and business processes for each business function
uEnterprise Business Functions You use these business functions to activatethe developments for the enhancement packages SAP ERP contains bothindustry-independent and industry-specific enterprise business functions
u Industry business functions These business functions contain functions that belong tothe industry enhancements introduced with SAP ERP 60You cannot activate industry business functions of an industry business functionset parallel to other industry business functions in anABAP-based systeminstanceTherefore some business function sets are available where the requirements of severalindustries are linked with one another for example the SAP Oil and Gas with theUtilitiesbusiness function set
Business functions also provide you with a test catalog which allows you to test new functionalityand its specific documentation
n Business Function Sets The business functions are grouped in business function sets in yourABAP-based ECC system There are two types of business functions setsl General Business Function Set This contains the enterprise business functions and the
Enterprise Extensions These contain functions for the standard applications of AccountingLogistics Human Capital Management and some additional industry-specific applications
l Industry Business Function Set You use this to change your clients of an ECC system overto the applications and solutions tailored for an industry This business function set coversall industry business functions that can be used for an industry solution to be implementedexclusively on one system or one instance
Recommendation
A business function set is activated when you have activated at least one of the related businessfunctions We therefore recommend that you activate the business function set when you startconfiguring your system since the required industry-specific view of your Implementation Guideis only created once you have activated the related business function
n Technical UsageA technical usage refers to a set of product instances All product instances of a technical usagehave to be installed to enable a business function For information on the mapping of the technicalusage to business functions see SAP Note 1324838
1464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Example
l The technical usage Central Application refers to the product instance SAP ECC Server which isan ABAP main instance
l The technical usage Human Capital Management refers to two different product instances thefirst one is Human Capital Management which is an ABAP main instance and the second one isSAP Portal Content which is a JAVA main instance A technical usage tells you which softwarecomponent must be installed in your SAP ERP 60 system The main instance tells youwhere to install it in the ABAP or Java part of your system The technical usage can alsoinclude content for a SAP Portal SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BImdash previously known as SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse or SAP NetWeaver BW)) or SAPNetWeaver Exchange Insfrastructure (SAP NetWeaver XI) system
n Main Instances and Software ComponentsA software component is the smallest maintainable unit within the SAP software model thus thebasis for support packages For installation purposes a software component is assigned to one orseveral product instances All content (BI EP PI content) is shipped as software components
Example
The technical usage Central Application consists of two software components in the above figureEA-APPL 605 and SAP_APPL 605 From a technical point of view both software components mustbe installed to launch the new function New General Ledger Accounting
The product instance (or main instance) comprises a set of software components
Example
The product instance in the above figure is SAP ECC Server which consists of severalapplication-specific software components such as SAP_APPL SAP_HR or EA-Retail
With enhancement packages new or enhanced objects that are contained in special contentproduct instances are shipped The following types of content are availablel Role Content provides a single pointmdashofmdashaccess for SAP business applications reports and
technologies For example it allows a seamless integration of classic SAP GUI-based transactionsand Web Dynpro-based applications There are two different options to run role content
uSAP Netweaver Business Client (NWBC)The NWBC enables you to directly access PFCGroles on the SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP
uSAP Netweaver Enterprise Portal The Enterprise Portal (EP) enables you to run portalroles which are captured in business packages The EP allows an easy integration of JAVAapplications and supports complex multi-system scenarios
12202010 PUBLIC 1564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
l Business Intelligence content (BI content mdash previously known as SAP NetWeaverBusiness Warehouse content or SAP NetWeaver BW content) In your BW system new orchanged objects as of the enhancement packages are stored in own InfoAreas
l SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure content (XI content) and enterprise servicesAs part of the enhancement packages you receive additional enterprise services Theimplementations of these enterprise services are in the software component versions of yourABAP-based system In the XI system these enterprise services are grouped in their ownsoftware components and namespaces for the enhancement packages For more informationabout these enterprise services see the documentation of the business function and therelated release notes
The following figure explains the relationship between business functions technical usage andsoftware components using the business function example HCM Administrative Services 03 You canuse this business function to get the latest functions for HCM processes and formsThe business function HCM Administrative Services 03 is mapped to the technical usage Human CapitalManagement This technical usage requires several product instances such as SAP ECC ServerSAP NW ‒ EP Core and SAP Portal Content As you can see in the figure the technical usagehighlighted in yellow is the only grouping entity stretched across different product instances
Figure 4 Software Architecture SAP ERP ‒ Example Human Capital Management BusinessFunction HCM Administrative Services HCM_ASR_CI_3
From a technical point of view you install software components SAP_HR 605 and EA_HR 605 inyour SAP ECC Server system as well as the related enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70
1664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Business packages related to HCM Administrative Services and portal content are deployed inthe Java part of the SAP NW ‒ EP core system
Industry Business Solutions
As mentioned in the previous chapter [page 9] industry business solutions have been integrated into theSAP ECC Server There are different ways to make the functionality for an industry business solutionavailable SAP ERP therefore distinguishes between the following types of industry business solutions
n Industry business solutions delivered as central component These industry businesssolutions are available immediately after the installation of the product instance SAP ECC youdo not have to activate a business function
n Industry business solutions available as business function set (industry enhancement)Youuse the business function set to activate the industry-specific functions that change your ECCsystem over to the requirements of a specific industry These business function sets are alsoavailable with SAP ECC you do not have to install an add-on
n Industry-specific business processes or industry business solutions delivered as EnterpriseExtension or Enterprise business function
n Industry business solutions delivered as add-on You have to install these industry businesssolutions separately
More Information
n Further details of the relationship between business functions technical usage product instancesand software components are visible in the mapping of business functions to technical usagesSee PDF attachment in the SAP Note 1324838
n The ldquoApplication Operation Guide for SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo containsthe component matrix for ABAP and Java components as well as for additional componentsThe guide is available at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement packages 5 for SAP ERP 60 ldquoSOG SAP enhancement packages5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo
n For more information about the different industries refer to the individual Master Guides for eachindustry You find them at httpservicesapcominstguides Note that the Master Guidesfor the industries cover industry scenarios running in the entire SAP Business Suite not justSAP ERP
n For more information on the individual business functions see wwwhelpsapcom SAP ERPSAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60) Business Functions in SAP ERP
n For more information on roles refer to SAP Note 1522708
12202010 PUBLIC 1764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
The following list summarizes important facts about the enhancement package concept andrecommended approaches
n Install only selected parts of the enhancement package The selection is driven by the functionalneed from a business point of view
n You cannot mix the installation of different enhancement package versions in your ABAP-basedSAP system You can have just one enhancement package version in the SAP system
n SAP enhancement packages are cumulative meaning that each new enhancement packageincludes new innovations of its own as well as all innovations delivered with prior packages
n We recommend installing the latest available enhancement package versionn Install enhancement packages and Support Packages in one single step (this includes the
preconditioned Support Packages)n SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the Support
Package versions of the underlying SAP systemn SAP enhancement packages have the same maintenance period as the underlying core applicationn The installation of an enhancement package is irreversible
n As long as you do not activate a business function the installation of an enhancement packagehas no impact on existing business processes or user interfacesYou can only activate business functions in ABAP-based systems not in Java-based SAP systems
n The activation of most business functions and extension sets is irreversible Only a small numberof business functions is reversibleTest the installation process and activation of new functions in advance on a sandbox systemEnsure that you evaluate the runtime and the SAP system behavior its dependencies and impactsMake sure that your SAP system is free of errors before going live
25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
This chapter provides an overview of the technical changes that are included with the latest availableenhancement package version
n Use of SAP Solution Manager ismandatory Ensure that you have installed SAP SolutionManager SP23 or higher Also ensure that you have correctly defined and maintained yoursystem landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY)As of enhancement package 5 the add-on landscape verification 10 for SAP Solution Manageris available This add-on allows you to identify issues in your SAP Solution Manager landscape(transaction SMSY) before they cause problems for example during a system update Example for
1864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAPERP
21 Enhancement Package Key Concept
We have adapted our major release strategy to better fit your adoption cycle To ensure that youbenefit from new developments and innovations while minimizing the impact on your coreoperational systems SAP uses enhancement packages to speed up the delivery of new functionsWith SAP enhancement packages you can install and activate new functions depending on yourbusiness needs without having to perform a system upgradeYou can selectively implement the new functions and activate the software upon business demandAs a result you can isolate the impact of software updates and make new functions available fasterdue to shortened test cycles
Implementation
There are three different scenarios to implement an enhancement package
n Installation of an enhancement package on an existing SAP systemn New installation of an SAP system including an enhancement packagen Upgrade of an SAP system including an enhancement package
The installation process of enhancement packages consists of two different steps
n Technical installation of an enhancement packagen Activation of new functions using the switch framework technology
You have a choice on both levels ‒ installation and activation You do not need to install a fullenhancement package Instead you can update the software components that are related to thefunctional enhancements you want to useFrom a business point of view functional enhancements are grouped into business functions (BFs)The technical installation of the business functions does not change the system behavior The newfunctions are available in the system but are not active After the installation no user interface orprocess change takes place You must explicitly activate new functions so that they become visiblein the system As a result changes are predictable and there are no side effects as only the activatedareas changeWith the switch framework technology (transaction SFW5) it is possible to control the activation ofnew SAP objects in ABAP-based SAP systems The activation process triggers a background job thatautomatically performs all changes in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP21 Enhancement Package Key Concept
Caution
You cannot reverse most business function once they are activated Due to technical restrictionsonly a limited number of business functions are reversible
After you have activated a business function you can see the changes and new developments inthe SAP system for example
n Menu entries
n New screens
n New fields on the application user interfacesn IMG activities required for the implementationn New table entries in Customizing tables and system tables
You can create a transport request with the current settings of the switch framework You cancheck functional changes and the impact of an activated business function in advance in the businessfunction documentation
Recommendation
Test the installation and activation on a sandbox system
Maintenance
SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the SupportPackage versions of the underlying SAP system We highly recommend installing the enhancementpackage in combination with the latest available Support Package stack This approach reducesinstallation modification adjustment and testing effort Using this strategy you can install SAPenhancement packages as a normal maintenance activity together with Support Package stacksAn enhancement package requires a specific Support Package stack level in the source release SAPsystem If the SAP system is on a lower Support Package stack level all relevant Support Packagestacks are automatically included into the download queue as well as the latest available SupportPackages for the enhancement package
Tools
The enhancement package installation requires the following tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizern Installation or upgrade tools (depending on your scenario)
The SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (accessible from the Change Management workcenter) supports the download of a consistent queue that includes all necessary Support Packagesand enhancement packages In addition SAP Solution Manager calculates a valid import queue forthe selected SAP system and generates the enhancement package stack configuration file that yourequire for the installation
864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
For the new installation of an SAP system including enhancement package as well as for the upgradeof an SAP system to a higher release including an enhancement package you use the standardinstallation and upgrade tools (SAPinst SAPup and SAPJup) To install an enhancement packageon an existing SAP system you use the SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) It allowsenhancement packages to be installed with reduced downtime SAPehpi uses the shadow systeminstallation strategy a well-known feature in the upgrade technology
22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
Understanding the architecture of SAP ERP software is key to understanding the enhancementpackage concept This short summary provides an overview of the software components that arerelevant to SAP ERP 60 from an application and industry point of viewSAP ERP 60 is based on SAP NetWeaver 70 and consists of different product instances and softwarecomponents (see Chapter 23 [page 11]) Each of them represents a particular functional piece of thesoftware The following table gives an overview of the SAP ERP 60 software components
ABAP Components
SAP ECC 60 Add-Ons ABAP BI Content SAP SRM
EA-APPL 600 INSURANCE 600 cPROJECT SUITE40
BI Content 702 SAP SRM 50 Server
EA-FINSERV 600 IS-CWM 600 SAP CATALOG 20
EA-GLTRADE 600 IS-H 600 WFMCORE 20
EA-HR 600 IS-M 600
EA-IPPE 400 IS-OIL 600
EA-PS 600 IS-PS-CA 600
EA-RETAIL 600 IS-UT 600
ECC-DIMP 600 SAP AP 70
ES-DFPS 600 SAP-APPL 600
FI-CA 600 SAP-HR 600
FI-CAX 600 ST-PI
ERECRUIT 600 LSO (FE) 600
FINBASIS 600 SEM BW 600
JAVA Components
Java WebApplications
EP Content XI Content
12202010 PUBLIC 964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
BILLER DIRECT 60 Business Packages XI Content forApplications
LSO (CP) 600 ELSTER 20
SAP XSS 60
XECO 50
Additional Components
SAP SolutionManager
Front End
LSO (AE) 600 SAP Easy DocumentManagement 60
LSO (OP) 600 SAP GUI 620640
cProject ECL Viewer512
SEM FrontendComponents
Open PS for MSProject 202
BIBW FrontendComponents
The ABAP software units of SAP ECC 60 and the SAP SRM Server are part of SAP ERP 60 Thesoftware component BI Content includes the content that is required to install product instance ldquoSAPNW - Business Intelligencerdquo You need to install this content as wellSome other examples of product instances are
n SAP NW ‒ EP Core
n SAP NW ‒ Application Server Javan SAP XSS (Self-Services)n SAP SRM - Server
Java components include the general Java Web applications such as SAP XSS on the one hand andcontent packages on the other hand The content packages are available for the product instancesSAP NetWeaver - EP Core and SAP NetWeaver ‒ Process Integration (PI) The content is installed inaddition to product instance SAP NetWeaver - EP Core or product instance SAP NetWeaver - ProcessIntegration (PI)The software components of SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC 60 product instance SAPECC Server) shown in this figure cannot be installed individually they are always installed as oneinstance Nevertheless support packages for each subcomponent are available Therefore you canpatch each required subcomponent separatelyThe components included with the Java Web Applications are independent J2EE componentscombined in one single installation tool as product instance SAP XECO Therefore if you want toinstall one or more of these components you need the ERP Java Components installation which isperformed by SAPinst
1064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
With SAP ERP you also receive a series of industry business solutions that were formerly delivered asIndustry Solution Add-Ons These add-ons have been integrated into the product instance SAP ECCServer The following industry business solutions are available with SAP ECC 60
n SAP Catch Weight Managementn Defense Forces amp Public Securityn SAP Discrete Industries and Mill Products
n SAP HealthcareSAP Ambulatory Care Managementn SAP for Insurance
n SAP Media
n SAP Miningn SAP Oil amp Gas
n Collection and Disbursement (PSCD)n SAP Retail
n Campus Managementn SAP Telecommunications
n SAP Utilities
n Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
You can use many of the industry business solutions by activating the corresponding businessfunctions and business function sets You use them to configure your ECC system to therequirements of the industry business solution To find out which business industry solutions youcan use refer to the Product Availability Matrix at httpservicesapcompamFor more information on the different types of industry business solutions see Enhancement Packages andSoftware Components Architecture Overview [page 11]
More InformationFor more information about the SAP ERP 60 technology or about the architecture of theSwitch Framework see the ldquoMaster Guide for SAP ERP 60rdquo on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomerp-instImportant SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 see SAPNote 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
23 Enhancement Packages and Software ComponentsArchitecture Overview
Prior to the availability of the enhancement package delivery architecture it was necessary to upgradethe complete SAP system instance to a new release for example from SAP R3 46C to SAP ERP 60With enhancement packages it is now possible to update individual software components of your
12202010 PUBLIC 1164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
SAP ERP system or to install new software components always based on your choice of technicalusage For example with technical usage ldquoHuman Capital Managementrdquo you can update SAP ERP 60software component SAP_HR 600 and EA-HR 600 to SAP_HR 605 and EA-HR 605
Note
Update only software components that are related to the functions you want to use
SAP ERP 60 ECC Server consists of two different types of software components
n Application-related software components such as SAP_APPL or SAP_HRn SAP NetWeaver-related software components such as SAP_BASIS or SAP_ABA
In this example the application components in the following figure have version 600 (for exampleEA-HR 600) and the Basis (NetWeaver) components have version 700 which is the given situationwith SAP ERP 60 without any enhancement packages After installation of the technical usage Retailselected software components of the application area have been updated to a higher version such asSAP_APPL 605 EA-Retail 605 as well as the NetWeaver component to version 702
Figure 1 Application Components after Installation of Technical Usage Retail
A verification of your own component version can be evaluated by logging into your SAP ERP ABAPsystem and choosing System Status in the menu The Component Information pushbutton displaysthe details In addition each software component has its own support packages which can beimported separately (for each component) or component-wide ‒ using Support Package Stacks Inthis example the software component SAP_HR is on version 605 and Support Package level 1
Figure 2 Example for Component Information
1264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
The business functions and thus the business-related features that you plan to use will dictatewhich software components you must install in your existing system instances The following figurehelps you to understand the relationship between business functions technical usages softwarecomponents and product instances
Figure 3 Example for Mapping Process Relationship Between Technical Usages Business Functionsand Software Components
n Business FunctionThe business functions in an enhancement package define the functional scope which you canactivate and use in the supported business process A business function has two meaningsl It is the business entity that provides information about process enhancements and information
about what you have to install to use those process enhancements All required businessfunctions are summarized in the technical usage
l It is the technical entity in the ABAP instance that can be switched on using the switchframework transaction (SFW5)
Example
The business function 2 New General Ledger Accounting with the technical name FIN_GL_CI_1comprises the enhancements within the new general ledger accounting functions Thisbusiness function is part of the technical usage ldquoCentral Applicationrdquo
12202010 PUBLIC 1364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Note
For SAP ERP transaction SFW5 covers the following three types of business functions
uEnterprise Extension These business functions are available for full releases of SAP ECC(up to SAP ERP 60) You use them to activate a number of industry-independent andindustry-specific applications and business processes for each business function
uEnterprise Business Functions You use these business functions to activatethe developments for the enhancement packages SAP ERP contains bothindustry-independent and industry-specific enterprise business functions
u Industry business functions These business functions contain functions that belong tothe industry enhancements introduced with SAP ERP 60You cannot activate industry business functions of an industry business functionset parallel to other industry business functions in anABAP-based systeminstanceTherefore some business function sets are available where the requirements of severalindustries are linked with one another for example the SAP Oil and Gas with theUtilitiesbusiness function set
Business functions also provide you with a test catalog which allows you to test new functionalityand its specific documentation
n Business Function Sets The business functions are grouped in business function sets in yourABAP-based ECC system There are two types of business functions setsl General Business Function Set This contains the enterprise business functions and the
Enterprise Extensions These contain functions for the standard applications of AccountingLogistics Human Capital Management and some additional industry-specific applications
l Industry Business Function Set You use this to change your clients of an ECC system overto the applications and solutions tailored for an industry This business function set coversall industry business functions that can be used for an industry solution to be implementedexclusively on one system or one instance
Recommendation
A business function set is activated when you have activated at least one of the related businessfunctions We therefore recommend that you activate the business function set when you startconfiguring your system since the required industry-specific view of your Implementation Guideis only created once you have activated the related business function
n Technical UsageA technical usage refers to a set of product instances All product instances of a technical usagehave to be installed to enable a business function For information on the mapping of the technicalusage to business functions see SAP Note 1324838
1464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Example
l The technical usage Central Application refers to the product instance SAP ECC Server which isan ABAP main instance
l The technical usage Human Capital Management refers to two different product instances thefirst one is Human Capital Management which is an ABAP main instance and the second one isSAP Portal Content which is a JAVA main instance A technical usage tells you which softwarecomponent must be installed in your SAP ERP 60 system The main instance tells youwhere to install it in the ABAP or Java part of your system The technical usage can alsoinclude content for a SAP Portal SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BImdash previously known as SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse or SAP NetWeaver BW)) or SAPNetWeaver Exchange Insfrastructure (SAP NetWeaver XI) system
n Main Instances and Software ComponentsA software component is the smallest maintainable unit within the SAP software model thus thebasis for support packages For installation purposes a software component is assigned to one orseveral product instances All content (BI EP PI content) is shipped as software components
Example
The technical usage Central Application consists of two software components in the above figureEA-APPL 605 and SAP_APPL 605 From a technical point of view both software components mustbe installed to launch the new function New General Ledger Accounting
The product instance (or main instance) comprises a set of software components
Example
The product instance in the above figure is SAP ECC Server which consists of severalapplication-specific software components such as SAP_APPL SAP_HR or EA-Retail
With enhancement packages new or enhanced objects that are contained in special contentproduct instances are shipped The following types of content are availablel Role Content provides a single pointmdashofmdashaccess for SAP business applications reports and
technologies For example it allows a seamless integration of classic SAP GUI-based transactionsand Web Dynpro-based applications There are two different options to run role content
uSAP Netweaver Business Client (NWBC)The NWBC enables you to directly access PFCGroles on the SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP
uSAP Netweaver Enterprise Portal The Enterprise Portal (EP) enables you to run portalroles which are captured in business packages The EP allows an easy integration of JAVAapplications and supports complex multi-system scenarios
12202010 PUBLIC 1564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
l Business Intelligence content (BI content mdash previously known as SAP NetWeaverBusiness Warehouse content or SAP NetWeaver BW content) In your BW system new orchanged objects as of the enhancement packages are stored in own InfoAreas
l SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure content (XI content) and enterprise servicesAs part of the enhancement packages you receive additional enterprise services Theimplementations of these enterprise services are in the software component versions of yourABAP-based system In the XI system these enterprise services are grouped in their ownsoftware components and namespaces for the enhancement packages For more informationabout these enterprise services see the documentation of the business function and therelated release notes
The following figure explains the relationship between business functions technical usage andsoftware components using the business function example HCM Administrative Services 03 You canuse this business function to get the latest functions for HCM processes and formsThe business function HCM Administrative Services 03 is mapped to the technical usage Human CapitalManagement This technical usage requires several product instances such as SAP ECC ServerSAP NW ‒ EP Core and SAP Portal Content As you can see in the figure the technical usagehighlighted in yellow is the only grouping entity stretched across different product instances
Figure 4 Software Architecture SAP ERP ‒ Example Human Capital Management BusinessFunction HCM Administrative Services HCM_ASR_CI_3
From a technical point of view you install software components SAP_HR 605 and EA_HR 605 inyour SAP ECC Server system as well as the related enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70
1664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Business packages related to HCM Administrative Services and portal content are deployed inthe Java part of the SAP NW ‒ EP core system
Industry Business Solutions
As mentioned in the previous chapter [page 9] industry business solutions have been integrated into theSAP ECC Server There are different ways to make the functionality for an industry business solutionavailable SAP ERP therefore distinguishes between the following types of industry business solutions
n Industry business solutions delivered as central component These industry businesssolutions are available immediately after the installation of the product instance SAP ECC youdo not have to activate a business function
n Industry business solutions available as business function set (industry enhancement)Youuse the business function set to activate the industry-specific functions that change your ECCsystem over to the requirements of a specific industry These business function sets are alsoavailable with SAP ECC you do not have to install an add-on
n Industry-specific business processes or industry business solutions delivered as EnterpriseExtension or Enterprise business function
n Industry business solutions delivered as add-on You have to install these industry businesssolutions separately
More Information
n Further details of the relationship between business functions technical usage product instancesand software components are visible in the mapping of business functions to technical usagesSee PDF attachment in the SAP Note 1324838
n The ldquoApplication Operation Guide for SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo containsthe component matrix for ABAP and Java components as well as for additional componentsThe guide is available at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement packages 5 for SAP ERP 60 ldquoSOG SAP enhancement packages5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo
n For more information about the different industries refer to the individual Master Guides for eachindustry You find them at httpservicesapcominstguides Note that the Master Guidesfor the industries cover industry scenarios running in the entire SAP Business Suite not justSAP ERP
n For more information on the individual business functions see wwwhelpsapcom SAP ERPSAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60) Business Functions in SAP ERP
n For more information on roles refer to SAP Note 1522708
12202010 PUBLIC 1764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
The following list summarizes important facts about the enhancement package concept andrecommended approaches
n Install only selected parts of the enhancement package The selection is driven by the functionalneed from a business point of view
n You cannot mix the installation of different enhancement package versions in your ABAP-basedSAP system You can have just one enhancement package version in the SAP system
n SAP enhancement packages are cumulative meaning that each new enhancement packageincludes new innovations of its own as well as all innovations delivered with prior packages
n We recommend installing the latest available enhancement package versionn Install enhancement packages and Support Packages in one single step (this includes the
preconditioned Support Packages)n SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the Support
Package versions of the underlying SAP systemn SAP enhancement packages have the same maintenance period as the underlying core applicationn The installation of an enhancement package is irreversible
n As long as you do not activate a business function the installation of an enhancement packagehas no impact on existing business processes or user interfacesYou can only activate business functions in ABAP-based systems not in Java-based SAP systems
n The activation of most business functions and extension sets is irreversible Only a small numberof business functions is reversibleTest the installation process and activation of new functions in advance on a sandbox systemEnsure that you evaluate the runtime and the SAP system behavior its dependencies and impactsMake sure that your SAP system is free of errors before going live
25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
This chapter provides an overview of the technical changes that are included with the latest availableenhancement package version
n Use of SAP Solution Manager ismandatory Ensure that you have installed SAP SolutionManager SP23 or higher Also ensure that you have correctly defined and maintained yoursystem landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY)As of enhancement package 5 the add-on landscape verification 10 for SAP Solution Manageris available This add-on allows you to identify issues in your SAP Solution Manager landscape(transaction SMSY) before they cause problems for example during a system update Example for
1864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP21 Enhancement Package Key Concept
Caution
You cannot reverse most business function once they are activated Due to technical restrictionsonly a limited number of business functions are reversible
After you have activated a business function you can see the changes and new developments inthe SAP system for example
n Menu entries
n New screens
n New fields on the application user interfacesn IMG activities required for the implementationn New table entries in Customizing tables and system tables
You can create a transport request with the current settings of the switch framework You cancheck functional changes and the impact of an activated business function in advance in the businessfunction documentation
Recommendation
Test the installation and activation on a sandbox system
Maintenance
SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the SupportPackage versions of the underlying SAP system We highly recommend installing the enhancementpackage in combination with the latest available Support Package stack This approach reducesinstallation modification adjustment and testing effort Using this strategy you can install SAPenhancement packages as a normal maintenance activity together with Support Package stacksAn enhancement package requires a specific Support Package stack level in the source release SAPsystem If the SAP system is on a lower Support Package stack level all relevant Support Packagestacks are automatically included into the download queue as well as the latest available SupportPackages for the enhancement package
Tools
The enhancement package installation requires the following tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizern Installation or upgrade tools (depending on your scenario)
The SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (accessible from the Change Management workcenter) supports the download of a consistent queue that includes all necessary Support Packagesand enhancement packages In addition SAP Solution Manager calculates a valid import queue forthe selected SAP system and generates the enhancement package stack configuration file that yourequire for the installation
864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
For the new installation of an SAP system including enhancement package as well as for the upgradeof an SAP system to a higher release including an enhancement package you use the standardinstallation and upgrade tools (SAPinst SAPup and SAPJup) To install an enhancement packageon an existing SAP system you use the SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) It allowsenhancement packages to be installed with reduced downtime SAPehpi uses the shadow systeminstallation strategy a well-known feature in the upgrade technology
22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
Understanding the architecture of SAP ERP software is key to understanding the enhancementpackage concept This short summary provides an overview of the software components that arerelevant to SAP ERP 60 from an application and industry point of viewSAP ERP 60 is based on SAP NetWeaver 70 and consists of different product instances and softwarecomponents (see Chapter 23 [page 11]) Each of them represents a particular functional piece of thesoftware The following table gives an overview of the SAP ERP 60 software components
ABAP Components
SAP ECC 60 Add-Ons ABAP BI Content SAP SRM
EA-APPL 600 INSURANCE 600 cPROJECT SUITE40
BI Content 702 SAP SRM 50 Server
EA-FINSERV 600 IS-CWM 600 SAP CATALOG 20
EA-GLTRADE 600 IS-H 600 WFMCORE 20
EA-HR 600 IS-M 600
EA-IPPE 400 IS-OIL 600
EA-PS 600 IS-PS-CA 600
EA-RETAIL 600 IS-UT 600
ECC-DIMP 600 SAP AP 70
ES-DFPS 600 SAP-APPL 600
FI-CA 600 SAP-HR 600
FI-CAX 600 ST-PI
ERECRUIT 600 LSO (FE) 600
FINBASIS 600 SEM BW 600
JAVA Components
Java WebApplications
EP Content XI Content
12202010 PUBLIC 964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
BILLER DIRECT 60 Business Packages XI Content forApplications
LSO (CP) 600 ELSTER 20
SAP XSS 60
XECO 50
Additional Components
SAP SolutionManager
Front End
LSO (AE) 600 SAP Easy DocumentManagement 60
LSO (OP) 600 SAP GUI 620640
cProject ECL Viewer512
SEM FrontendComponents
Open PS for MSProject 202
BIBW FrontendComponents
The ABAP software units of SAP ECC 60 and the SAP SRM Server are part of SAP ERP 60 Thesoftware component BI Content includes the content that is required to install product instance ldquoSAPNW - Business Intelligencerdquo You need to install this content as wellSome other examples of product instances are
n SAP NW ‒ EP Core
n SAP NW ‒ Application Server Javan SAP XSS (Self-Services)n SAP SRM - Server
Java components include the general Java Web applications such as SAP XSS on the one hand andcontent packages on the other hand The content packages are available for the product instancesSAP NetWeaver - EP Core and SAP NetWeaver ‒ Process Integration (PI) The content is installed inaddition to product instance SAP NetWeaver - EP Core or product instance SAP NetWeaver - ProcessIntegration (PI)The software components of SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC 60 product instance SAPECC Server) shown in this figure cannot be installed individually they are always installed as oneinstance Nevertheless support packages for each subcomponent are available Therefore you canpatch each required subcomponent separatelyThe components included with the Java Web Applications are independent J2EE componentscombined in one single installation tool as product instance SAP XECO Therefore if you want toinstall one or more of these components you need the ERP Java Components installation which isperformed by SAPinst
1064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
With SAP ERP you also receive a series of industry business solutions that were formerly delivered asIndustry Solution Add-Ons These add-ons have been integrated into the product instance SAP ECCServer The following industry business solutions are available with SAP ECC 60
n SAP Catch Weight Managementn Defense Forces amp Public Securityn SAP Discrete Industries and Mill Products
n SAP HealthcareSAP Ambulatory Care Managementn SAP for Insurance
n SAP Media
n SAP Miningn SAP Oil amp Gas
n Collection and Disbursement (PSCD)n SAP Retail
n Campus Managementn SAP Telecommunications
n SAP Utilities
n Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
You can use many of the industry business solutions by activating the corresponding businessfunctions and business function sets You use them to configure your ECC system to therequirements of the industry business solution To find out which business industry solutions youcan use refer to the Product Availability Matrix at httpservicesapcompamFor more information on the different types of industry business solutions see Enhancement Packages andSoftware Components Architecture Overview [page 11]
More InformationFor more information about the SAP ERP 60 technology or about the architecture of theSwitch Framework see the ldquoMaster Guide for SAP ERP 60rdquo on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomerp-instImportant SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 see SAPNote 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
23 Enhancement Packages and Software ComponentsArchitecture Overview
Prior to the availability of the enhancement package delivery architecture it was necessary to upgradethe complete SAP system instance to a new release for example from SAP R3 46C to SAP ERP 60With enhancement packages it is now possible to update individual software components of your
12202010 PUBLIC 1164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
SAP ERP system or to install new software components always based on your choice of technicalusage For example with technical usage ldquoHuman Capital Managementrdquo you can update SAP ERP 60software component SAP_HR 600 and EA-HR 600 to SAP_HR 605 and EA-HR 605
Note
Update only software components that are related to the functions you want to use
SAP ERP 60 ECC Server consists of two different types of software components
n Application-related software components such as SAP_APPL or SAP_HRn SAP NetWeaver-related software components such as SAP_BASIS or SAP_ABA
In this example the application components in the following figure have version 600 (for exampleEA-HR 600) and the Basis (NetWeaver) components have version 700 which is the given situationwith SAP ERP 60 without any enhancement packages After installation of the technical usage Retailselected software components of the application area have been updated to a higher version such asSAP_APPL 605 EA-Retail 605 as well as the NetWeaver component to version 702
Figure 1 Application Components after Installation of Technical Usage Retail
A verification of your own component version can be evaluated by logging into your SAP ERP ABAPsystem and choosing System Status in the menu The Component Information pushbutton displaysthe details In addition each software component has its own support packages which can beimported separately (for each component) or component-wide ‒ using Support Package Stacks Inthis example the software component SAP_HR is on version 605 and Support Package level 1
Figure 2 Example for Component Information
1264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
The business functions and thus the business-related features that you plan to use will dictatewhich software components you must install in your existing system instances The following figurehelps you to understand the relationship between business functions technical usages softwarecomponents and product instances
Figure 3 Example for Mapping Process Relationship Between Technical Usages Business Functionsand Software Components
n Business FunctionThe business functions in an enhancement package define the functional scope which you canactivate and use in the supported business process A business function has two meaningsl It is the business entity that provides information about process enhancements and information
about what you have to install to use those process enhancements All required businessfunctions are summarized in the technical usage
l It is the technical entity in the ABAP instance that can be switched on using the switchframework transaction (SFW5)
Example
The business function 2 New General Ledger Accounting with the technical name FIN_GL_CI_1comprises the enhancements within the new general ledger accounting functions Thisbusiness function is part of the technical usage ldquoCentral Applicationrdquo
12202010 PUBLIC 1364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Note
For SAP ERP transaction SFW5 covers the following three types of business functions
uEnterprise Extension These business functions are available for full releases of SAP ECC(up to SAP ERP 60) You use them to activate a number of industry-independent andindustry-specific applications and business processes for each business function
uEnterprise Business Functions You use these business functions to activatethe developments for the enhancement packages SAP ERP contains bothindustry-independent and industry-specific enterprise business functions
u Industry business functions These business functions contain functions that belong tothe industry enhancements introduced with SAP ERP 60You cannot activate industry business functions of an industry business functionset parallel to other industry business functions in anABAP-based systeminstanceTherefore some business function sets are available where the requirements of severalindustries are linked with one another for example the SAP Oil and Gas with theUtilitiesbusiness function set
Business functions also provide you with a test catalog which allows you to test new functionalityand its specific documentation
n Business Function Sets The business functions are grouped in business function sets in yourABAP-based ECC system There are two types of business functions setsl General Business Function Set This contains the enterprise business functions and the
Enterprise Extensions These contain functions for the standard applications of AccountingLogistics Human Capital Management and some additional industry-specific applications
l Industry Business Function Set You use this to change your clients of an ECC system overto the applications and solutions tailored for an industry This business function set coversall industry business functions that can be used for an industry solution to be implementedexclusively on one system or one instance
Recommendation
A business function set is activated when you have activated at least one of the related businessfunctions We therefore recommend that you activate the business function set when you startconfiguring your system since the required industry-specific view of your Implementation Guideis only created once you have activated the related business function
n Technical UsageA technical usage refers to a set of product instances All product instances of a technical usagehave to be installed to enable a business function For information on the mapping of the technicalusage to business functions see SAP Note 1324838
1464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Example
l The technical usage Central Application refers to the product instance SAP ECC Server which isan ABAP main instance
l The technical usage Human Capital Management refers to two different product instances thefirst one is Human Capital Management which is an ABAP main instance and the second one isSAP Portal Content which is a JAVA main instance A technical usage tells you which softwarecomponent must be installed in your SAP ERP 60 system The main instance tells youwhere to install it in the ABAP or Java part of your system The technical usage can alsoinclude content for a SAP Portal SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BImdash previously known as SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse or SAP NetWeaver BW)) or SAPNetWeaver Exchange Insfrastructure (SAP NetWeaver XI) system
n Main Instances and Software ComponentsA software component is the smallest maintainable unit within the SAP software model thus thebasis for support packages For installation purposes a software component is assigned to one orseveral product instances All content (BI EP PI content) is shipped as software components
Example
The technical usage Central Application consists of two software components in the above figureEA-APPL 605 and SAP_APPL 605 From a technical point of view both software components mustbe installed to launch the new function New General Ledger Accounting
The product instance (or main instance) comprises a set of software components
Example
The product instance in the above figure is SAP ECC Server which consists of severalapplication-specific software components such as SAP_APPL SAP_HR or EA-Retail
With enhancement packages new or enhanced objects that are contained in special contentproduct instances are shipped The following types of content are availablel Role Content provides a single pointmdashofmdashaccess for SAP business applications reports and
technologies For example it allows a seamless integration of classic SAP GUI-based transactionsand Web Dynpro-based applications There are two different options to run role content
uSAP Netweaver Business Client (NWBC)The NWBC enables you to directly access PFCGroles on the SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP
uSAP Netweaver Enterprise Portal The Enterprise Portal (EP) enables you to run portalroles which are captured in business packages The EP allows an easy integration of JAVAapplications and supports complex multi-system scenarios
12202010 PUBLIC 1564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
l Business Intelligence content (BI content mdash previously known as SAP NetWeaverBusiness Warehouse content or SAP NetWeaver BW content) In your BW system new orchanged objects as of the enhancement packages are stored in own InfoAreas
l SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure content (XI content) and enterprise servicesAs part of the enhancement packages you receive additional enterprise services Theimplementations of these enterprise services are in the software component versions of yourABAP-based system In the XI system these enterprise services are grouped in their ownsoftware components and namespaces for the enhancement packages For more informationabout these enterprise services see the documentation of the business function and therelated release notes
The following figure explains the relationship between business functions technical usage andsoftware components using the business function example HCM Administrative Services 03 You canuse this business function to get the latest functions for HCM processes and formsThe business function HCM Administrative Services 03 is mapped to the technical usage Human CapitalManagement This technical usage requires several product instances such as SAP ECC ServerSAP NW ‒ EP Core and SAP Portal Content As you can see in the figure the technical usagehighlighted in yellow is the only grouping entity stretched across different product instances
Figure 4 Software Architecture SAP ERP ‒ Example Human Capital Management BusinessFunction HCM Administrative Services HCM_ASR_CI_3
From a technical point of view you install software components SAP_HR 605 and EA_HR 605 inyour SAP ECC Server system as well as the related enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70
1664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Business packages related to HCM Administrative Services and portal content are deployed inthe Java part of the SAP NW ‒ EP core system
Industry Business Solutions
As mentioned in the previous chapter [page 9] industry business solutions have been integrated into theSAP ECC Server There are different ways to make the functionality for an industry business solutionavailable SAP ERP therefore distinguishes between the following types of industry business solutions
n Industry business solutions delivered as central component These industry businesssolutions are available immediately after the installation of the product instance SAP ECC youdo not have to activate a business function
n Industry business solutions available as business function set (industry enhancement)Youuse the business function set to activate the industry-specific functions that change your ECCsystem over to the requirements of a specific industry These business function sets are alsoavailable with SAP ECC you do not have to install an add-on
n Industry-specific business processes or industry business solutions delivered as EnterpriseExtension or Enterprise business function
n Industry business solutions delivered as add-on You have to install these industry businesssolutions separately
More Information
n Further details of the relationship between business functions technical usage product instancesand software components are visible in the mapping of business functions to technical usagesSee PDF attachment in the SAP Note 1324838
n The ldquoApplication Operation Guide for SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo containsthe component matrix for ABAP and Java components as well as for additional componentsThe guide is available at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement packages 5 for SAP ERP 60 ldquoSOG SAP enhancement packages5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo
n For more information about the different industries refer to the individual Master Guides for eachindustry You find them at httpservicesapcominstguides Note that the Master Guidesfor the industries cover industry scenarios running in the entire SAP Business Suite not justSAP ERP
n For more information on the individual business functions see wwwhelpsapcom SAP ERPSAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60) Business Functions in SAP ERP
n For more information on roles refer to SAP Note 1522708
12202010 PUBLIC 1764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
The following list summarizes important facts about the enhancement package concept andrecommended approaches
n Install only selected parts of the enhancement package The selection is driven by the functionalneed from a business point of view
n You cannot mix the installation of different enhancement package versions in your ABAP-basedSAP system You can have just one enhancement package version in the SAP system
n SAP enhancement packages are cumulative meaning that each new enhancement packageincludes new innovations of its own as well as all innovations delivered with prior packages
n We recommend installing the latest available enhancement package versionn Install enhancement packages and Support Packages in one single step (this includes the
preconditioned Support Packages)n SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the Support
Package versions of the underlying SAP systemn SAP enhancement packages have the same maintenance period as the underlying core applicationn The installation of an enhancement package is irreversible
n As long as you do not activate a business function the installation of an enhancement packagehas no impact on existing business processes or user interfacesYou can only activate business functions in ABAP-based systems not in Java-based SAP systems
n The activation of most business functions and extension sets is irreversible Only a small numberof business functions is reversibleTest the installation process and activation of new functions in advance on a sandbox systemEnsure that you evaluate the runtime and the SAP system behavior its dependencies and impactsMake sure that your SAP system is free of errors before going live
25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
This chapter provides an overview of the technical changes that are included with the latest availableenhancement package version
n Use of SAP Solution Manager ismandatory Ensure that you have installed SAP SolutionManager SP23 or higher Also ensure that you have correctly defined and maintained yoursystem landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY)As of enhancement package 5 the add-on landscape verification 10 for SAP Solution Manageris available This add-on allows you to identify issues in your SAP Solution Manager landscape(transaction SMSY) before they cause problems for example during a system update Example for
1864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
For the new installation of an SAP system including enhancement package as well as for the upgradeof an SAP system to a higher release including an enhancement package you use the standardinstallation and upgrade tools (SAPinst SAPup and SAPJup) To install an enhancement packageon an existing SAP system you use the SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) It allowsenhancement packages to be installed with reduced downtime SAPehpi uses the shadow systeminstallation strategy a well-known feature in the upgrade technology
22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
Understanding the architecture of SAP ERP software is key to understanding the enhancementpackage concept This short summary provides an overview of the software components that arerelevant to SAP ERP 60 from an application and industry point of viewSAP ERP 60 is based on SAP NetWeaver 70 and consists of different product instances and softwarecomponents (see Chapter 23 [page 11]) Each of them represents a particular functional piece of thesoftware The following table gives an overview of the SAP ERP 60 software components
ABAP Components
SAP ECC 60 Add-Ons ABAP BI Content SAP SRM
EA-APPL 600 INSURANCE 600 cPROJECT SUITE40
BI Content 702 SAP SRM 50 Server
EA-FINSERV 600 IS-CWM 600 SAP CATALOG 20
EA-GLTRADE 600 IS-H 600 WFMCORE 20
EA-HR 600 IS-M 600
EA-IPPE 400 IS-OIL 600
EA-PS 600 IS-PS-CA 600
EA-RETAIL 600 IS-UT 600
ECC-DIMP 600 SAP AP 70
ES-DFPS 600 SAP-APPL 600
FI-CA 600 SAP-HR 600
FI-CAX 600 ST-PI
ERECRUIT 600 LSO (FE) 600
FINBASIS 600 SEM BW 600
JAVA Components
Java WebApplications
EP Content XI Content
12202010 PUBLIC 964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
BILLER DIRECT 60 Business Packages XI Content forApplications
LSO (CP) 600 ELSTER 20
SAP XSS 60
XECO 50
Additional Components
SAP SolutionManager
Front End
LSO (AE) 600 SAP Easy DocumentManagement 60
LSO (OP) 600 SAP GUI 620640
cProject ECL Viewer512
SEM FrontendComponents
Open PS for MSProject 202
BIBW FrontendComponents
The ABAP software units of SAP ECC 60 and the SAP SRM Server are part of SAP ERP 60 Thesoftware component BI Content includes the content that is required to install product instance ldquoSAPNW - Business Intelligencerdquo You need to install this content as wellSome other examples of product instances are
n SAP NW ‒ EP Core
n SAP NW ‒ Application Server Javan SAP XSS (Self-Services)n SAP SRM - Server
Java components include the general Java Web applications such as SAP XSS on the one hand andcontent packages on the other hand The content packages are available for the product instancesSAP NetWeaver - EP Core and SAP NetWeaver ‒ Process Integration (PI) The content is installed inaddition to product instance SAP NetWeaver - EP Core or product instance SAP NetWeaver - ProcessIntegration (PI)The software components of SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC 60 product instance SAPECC Server) shown in this figure cannot be installed individually they are always installed as oneinstance Nevertheless support packages for each subcomponent are available Therefore you canpatch each required subcomponent separatelyThe components included with the Java Web Applications are independent J2EE componentscombined in one single installation tool as product instance SAP XECO Therefore if you want toinstall one or more of these components you need the ERP Java Components installation which isperformed by SAPinst
1064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
With SAP ERP you also receive a series of industry business solutions that were formerly delivered asIndustry Solution Add-Ons These add-ons have been integrated into the product instance SAP ECCServer The following industry business solutions are available with SAP ECC 60
n SAP Catch Weight Managementn Defense Forces amp Public Securityn SAP Discrete Industries and Mill Products
n SAP HealthcareSAP Ambulatory Care Managementn SAP for Insurance
n SAP Media
n SAP Miningn SAP Oil amp Gas
n Collection and Disbursement (PSCD)n SAP Retail
n Campus Managementn SAP Telecommunications
n SAP Utilities
n Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
You can use many of the industry business solutions by activating the corresponding businessfunctions and business function sets You use them to configure your ECC system to therequirements of the industry business solution To find out which business industry solutions youcan use refer to the Product Availability Matrix at httpservicesapcompamFor more information on the different types of industry business solutions see Enhancement Packages andSoftware Components Architecture Overview [page 11]
More InformationFor more information about the SAP ERP 60 technology or about the architecture of theSwitch Framework see the ldquoMaster Guide for SAP ERP 60rdquo on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomerp-instImportant SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 see SAPNote 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
23 Enhancement Packages and Software ComponentsArchitecture Overview
Prior to the availability of the enhancement package delivery architecture it was necessary to upgradethe complete SAP system instance to a new release for example from SAP R3 46C to SAP ERP 60With enhancement packages it is now possible to update individual software components of your
12202010 PUBLIC 1164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
SAP ERP system or to install new software components always based on your choice of technicalusage For example with technical usage ldquoHuman Capital Managementrdquo you can update SAP ERP 60software component SAP_HR 600 and EA-HR 600 to SAP_HR 605 and EA-HR 605
Note
Update only software components that are related to the functions you want to use
SAP ERP 60 ECC Server consists of two different types of software components
n Application-related software components such as SAP_APPL or SAP_HRn SAP NetWeaver-related software components such as SAP_BASIS or SAP_ABA
In this example the application components in the following figure have version 600 (for exampleEA-HR 600) and the Basis (NetWeaver) components have version 700 which is the given situationwith SAP ERP 60 without any enhancement packages After installation of the technical usage Retailselected software components of the application area have been updated to a higher version such asSAP_APPL 605 EA-Retail 605 as well as the NetWeaver component to version 702
Figure 1 Application Components after Installation of Technical Usage Retail
A verification of your own component version can be evaluated by logging into your SAP ERP ABAPsystem and choosing System Status in the menu The Component Information pushbutton displaysthe details In addition each software component has its own support packages which can beimported separately (for each component) or component-wide ‒ using Support Package Stacks Inthis example the software component SAP_HR is on version 605 and Support Package level 1
Figure 2 Example for Component Information
1264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
The business functions and thus the business-related features that you plan to use will dictatewhich software components you must install in your existing system instances The following figurehelps you to understand the relationship between business functions technical usages softwarecomponents and product instances
Figure 3 Example for Mapping Process Relationship Between Technical Usages Business Functionsand Software Components
n Business FunctionThe business functions in an enhancement package define the functional scope which you canactivate and use in the supported business process A business function has two meaningsl It is the business entity that provides information about process enhancements and information
about what you have to install to use those process enhancements All required businessfunctions are summarized in the technical usage
l It is the technical entity in the ABAP instance that can be switched on using the switchframework transaction (SFW5)
Example
The business function 2 New General Ledger Accounting with the technical name FIN_GL_CI_1comprises the enhancements within the new general ledger accounting functions Thisbusiness function is part of the technical usage ldquoCentral Applicationrdquo
12202010 PUBLIC 1364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Note
For SAP ERP transaction SFW5 covers the following three types of business functions
uEnterprise Extension These business functions are available for full releases of SAP ECC(up to SAP ERP 60) You use them to activate a number of industry-independent andindustry-specific applications and business processes for each business function
uEnterprise Business Functions You use these business functions to activatethe developments for the enhancement packages SAP ERP contains bothindustry-independent and industry-specific enterprise business functions
u Industry business functions These business functions contain functions that belong tothe industry enhancements introduced with SAP ERP 60You cannot activate industry business functions of an industry business functionset parallel to other industry business functions in anABAP-based systeminstanceTherefore some business function sets are available where the requirements of severalindustries are linked with one another for example the SAP Oil and Gas with theUtilitiesbusiness function set
Business functions also provide you with a test catalog which allows you to test new functionalityand its specific documentation
n Business Function Sets The business functions are grouped in business function sets in yourABAP-based ECC system There are two types of business functions setsl General Business Function Set This contains the enterprise business functions and the
Enterprise Extensions These contain functions for the standard applications of AccountingLogistics Human Capital Management and some additional industry-specific applications
l Industry Business Function Set You use this to change your clients of an ECC system overto the applications and solutions tailored for an industry This business function set coversall industry business functions that can be used for an industry solution to be implementedexclusively on one system or one instance
Recommendation
A business function set is activated when you have activated at least one of the related businessfunctions We therefore recommend that you activate the business function set when you startconfiguring your system since the required industry-specific view of your Implementation Guideis only created once you have activated the related business function
n Technical UsageA technical usage refers to a set of product instances All product instances of a technical usagehave to be installed to enable a business function For information on the mapping of the technicalusage to business functions see SAP Note 1324838
1464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Example
l The technical usage Central Application refers to the product instance SAP ECC Server which isan ABAP main instance
l The technical usage Human Capital Management refers to two different product instances thefirst one is Human Capital Management which is an ABAP main instance and the second one isSAP Portal Content which is a JAVA main instance A technical usage tells you which softwarecomponent must be installed in your SAP ERP 60 system The main instance tells youwhere to install it in the ABAP or Java part of your system The technical usage can alsoinclude content for a SAP Portal SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BImdash previously known as SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse or SAP NetWeaver BW)) or SAPNetWeaver Exchange Insfrastructure (SAP NetWeaver XI) system
n Main Instances and Software ComponentsA software component is the smallest maintainable unit within the SAP software model thus thebasis for support packages For installation purposes a software component is assigned to one orseveral product instances All content (BI EP PI content) is shipped as software components
Example
The technical usage Central Application consists of two software components in the above figureEA-APPL 605 and SAP_APPL 605 From a technical point of view both software components mustbe installed to launch the new function New General Ledger Accounting
The product instance (or main instance) comprises a set of software components
Example
The product instance in the above figure is SAP ECC Server which consists of severalapplication-specific software components such as SAP_APPL SAP_HR or EA-Retail
With enhancement packages new or enhanced objects that are contained in special contentproduct instances are shipped The following types of content are availablel Role Content provides a single pointmdashofmdashaccess for SAP business applications reports and
technologies For example it allows a seamless integration of classic SAP GUI-based transactionsand Web Dynpro-based applications There are two different options to run role content
uSAP Netweaver Business Client (NWBC)The NWBC enables you to directly access PFCGroles on the SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP
uSAP Netweaver Enterprise Portal The Enterprise Portal (EP) enables you to run portalroles which are captured in business packages The EP allows an easy integration of JAVAapplications and supports complex multi-system scenarios
12202010 PUBLIC 1564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
l Business Intelligence content (BI content mdash previously known as SAP NetWeaverBusiness Warehouse content or SAP NetWeaver BW content) In your BW system new orchanged objects as of the enhancement packages are stored in own InfoAreas
l SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure content (XI content) and enterprise servicesAs part of the enhancement packages you receive additional enterprise services Theimplementations of these enterprise services are in the software component versions of yourABAP-based system In the XI system these enterprise services are grouped in their ownsoftware components and namespaces for the enhancement packages For more informationabout these enterprise services see the documentation of the business function and therelated release notes
The following figure explains the relationship between business functions technical usage andsoftware components using the business function example HCM Administrative Services 03 You canuse this business function to get the latest functions for HCM processes and formsThe business function HCM Administrative Services 03 is mapped to the technical usage Human CapitalManagement This technical usage requires several product instances such as SAP ECC ServerSAP NW ‒ EP Core and SAP Portal Content As you can see in the figure the technical usagehighlighted in yellow is the only grouping entity stretched across different product instances
Figure 4 Software Architecture SAP ERP ‒ Example Human Capital Management BusinessFunction HCM Administrative Services HCM_ASR_CI_3
From a technical point of view you install software components SAP_HR 605 and EA_HR 605 inyour SAP ECC Server system as well as the related enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70
1664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Business packages related to HCM Administrative Services and portal content are deployed inthe Java part of the SAP NW ‒ EP core system
Industry Business Solutions
As mentioned in the previous chapter [page 9] industry business solutions have been integrated into theSAP ECC Server There are different ways to make the functionality for an industry business solutionavailable SAP ERP therefore distinguishes between the following types of industry business solutions
n Industry business solutions delivered as central component These industry businesssolutions are available immediately after the installation of the product instance SAP ECC youdo not have to activate a business function
n Industry business solutions available as business function set (industry enhancement)Youuse the business function set to activate the industry-specific functions that change your ECCsystem over to the requirements of a specific industry These business function sets are alsoavailable with SAP ECC you do not have to install an add-on
n Industry-specific business processes or industry business solutions delivered as EnterpriseExtension or Enterprise business function
n Industry business solutions delivered as add-on You have to install these industry businesssolutions separately
More Information
n Further details of the relationship between business functions technical usage product instancesand software components are visible in the mapping of business functions to technical usagesSee PDF attachment in the SAP Note 1324838
n The ldquoApplication Operation Guide for SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo containsthe component matrix for ABAP and Java components as well as for additional componentsThe guide is available at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement packages 5 for SAP ERP 60 ldquoSOG SAP enhancement packages5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo
n For more information about the different industries refer to the individual Master Guides for eachindustry You find them at httpservicesapcominstguides Note that the Master Guidesfor the industries cover industry scenarios running in the entire SAP Business Suite not justSAP ERP
n For more information on the individual business functions see wwwhelpsapcom SAP ERPSAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60) Business Functions in SAP ERP
n For more information on roles refer to SAP Note 1522708
12202010 PUBLIC 1764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
The following list summarizes important facts about the enhancement package concept andrecommended approaches
n Install only selected parts of the enhancement package The selection is driven by the functionalneed from a business point of view
n You cannot mix the installation of different enhancement package versions in your ABAP-basedSAP system You can have just one enhancement package version in the SAP system
n SAP enhancement packages are cumulative meaning that each new enhancement packageincludes new innovations of its own as well as all innovations delivered with prior packages
n We recommend installing the latest available enhancement package versionn Install enhancement packages and Support Packages in one single step (this includes the
preconditioned Support Packages)n SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the Support
Package versions of the underlying SAP systemn SAP enhancement packages have the same maintenance period as the underlying core applicationn The installation of an enhancement package is irreversible
n As long as you do not activate a business function the installation of an enhancement packagehas no impact on existing business processes or user interfacesYou can only activate business functions in ABAP-based systems not in Java-based SAP systems
n The activation of most business functions and extension sets is irreversible Only a small numberof business functions is reversibleTest the installation process and activation of new functions in advance on a sandbox systemEnsure that you evaluate the runtime and the SAP system behavior its dependencies and impactsMake sure that your SAP system is free of errors before going live
25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
This chapter provides an overview of the technical changes that are included with the latest availableenhancement package version
n Use of SAP Solution Manager ismandatory Ensure that you have installed SAP SolutionManager SP23 or higher Also ensure that you have correctly defined and maintained yoursystem landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY)As of enhancement package 5 the add-on landscape verification 10 for SAP Solution Manageris available This add-on allows you to identify issues in your SAP Solution Manager landscape(transaction SMSY) before they cause problems for example during a system update Example for
1864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP22 SAP ERP 60 Architecture Overview
BILLER DIRECT 60 Business Packages XI Content forApplications
LSO (CP) 600 ELSTER 20
SAP XSS 60
XECO 50
Additional Components
SAP SolutionManager
Front End
LSO (AE) 600 SAP Easy DocumentManagement 60
LSO (OP) 600 SAP GUI 620640
cProject ECL Viewer512
SEM FrontendComponents
Open PS for MSProject 202
BIBW FrontendComponents
The ABAP software units of SAP ECC 60 and the SAP SRM Server are part of SAP ERP 60 Thesoftware component BI Content includes the content that is required to install product instance ldquoSAPNW - Business Intelligencerdquo You need to install this content as wellSome other examples of product instances are
n SAP NW ‒ EP Core
n SAP NW ‒ Application Server Javan SAP XSS (Self-Services)n SAP SRM - Server
Java components include the general Java Web applications such as SAP XSS on the one hand andcontent packages on the other hand The content packages are available for the product instancesSAP NetWeaver - EP Core and SAP NetWeaver ‒ Process Integration (PI) The content is installed inaddition to product instance SAP NetWeaver - EP Core or product instance SAP NetWeaver - ProcessIntegration (PI)The software components of SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC 60 product instance SAPECC Server) shown in this figure cannot be installed individually they are always installed as oneinstance Nevertheless support packages for each subcomponent are available Therefore you canpatch each required subcomponent separatelyThe components included with the Java Web Applications are independent J2EE componentscombined in one single installation tool as product instance SAP XECO Therefore if you want toinstall one or more of these components you need the ERP Java Components installation which isperformed by SAPinst
1064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
With SAP ERP you also receive a series of industry business solutions that were formerly delivered asIndustry Solution Add-Ons These add-ons have been integrated into the product instance SAP ECCServer The following industry business solutions are available with SAP ECC 60
n SAP Catch Weight Managementn Defense Forces amp Public Securityn SAP Discrete Industries and Mill Products
n SAP HealthcareSAP Ambulatory Care Managementn SAP for Insurance
n SAP Media
n SAP Miningn SAP Oil amp Gas
n Collection and Disbursement (PSCD)n SAP Retail
n Campus Managementn SAP Telecommunications
n SAP Utilities
n Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
You can use many of the industry business solutions by activating the corresponding businessfunctions and business function sets You use them to configure your ECC system to therequirements of the industry business solution To find out which business industry solutions youcan use refer to the Product Availability Matrix at httpservicesapcompamFor more information on the different types of industry business solutions see Enhancement Packages andSoftware Components Architecture Overview [page 11]
More InformationFor more information about the SAP ERP 60 technology or about the architecture of theSwitch Framework see the ldquoMaster Guide for SAP ERP 60rdquo on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomerp-instImportant SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 see SAPNote 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
23 Enhancement Packages and Software ComponentsArchitecture Overview
Prior to the availability of the enhancement package delivery architecture it was necessary to upgradethe complete SAP system instance to a new release for example from SAP R3 46C to SAP ERP 60With enhancement packages it is now possible to update individual software components of your
12202010 PUBLIC 1164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
SAP ERP system or to install new software components always based on your choice of technicalusage For example with technical usage ldquoHuman Capital Managementrdquo you can update SAP ERP 60software component SAP_HR 600 and EA-HR 600 to SAP_HR 605 and EA-HR 605
Note
Update only software components that are related to the functions you want to use
SAP ERP 60 ECC Server consists of two different types of software components
n Application-related software components such as SAP_APPL or SAP_HRn SAP NetWeaver-related software components such as SAP_BASIS or SAP_ABA
In this example the application components in the following figure have version 600 (for exampleEA-HR 600) and the Basis (NetWeaver) components have version 700 which is the given situationwith SAP ERP 60 without any enhancement packages After installation of the technical usage Retailselected software components of the application area have been updated to a higher version such asSAP_APPL 605 EA-Retail 605 as well as the NetWeaver component to version 702
Figure 1 Application Components after Installation of Technical Usage Retail
A verification of your own component version can be evaluated by logging into your SAP ERP ABAPsystem and choosing System Status in the menu The Component Information pushbutton displaysthe details In addition each software component has its own support packages which can beimported separately (for each component) or component-wide ‒ using Support Package Stacks Inthis example the software component SAP_HR is on version 605 and Support Package level 1
Figure 2 Example for Component Information
1264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
The business functions and thus the business-related features that you plan to use will dictatewhich software components you must install in your existing system instances The following figurehelps you to understand the relationship between business functions technical usages softwarecomponents and product instances
Figure 3 Example for Mapping Process Relationship Between Technical Usages Business Functionsand Software Components
n Business FunctionThe business functions in an enhancement package define the functional scope which you canactivate and use in the supported business process A business function has two meaningsl It is the business entity that provides information about process enhancements and information
about what you have to install to use those process enhancements All required businessfunctions are summarized in the technical usage
l It is the technical entity in the ABAP instance that can be switched on using the switchframework transaction (SFW5)
Example
The business function 2 New General Ledger Accounting with the technical name FIN_GL_CI_1comprises the enhancements within the new general ledger accounting functions Thisbusiness function is part of the technical usage ldquoCentral Applicationrdquo
12202010 PUBLIC 1364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Note
For SAP ERP transaction SFW5 covers the following three types of business functions
uEnterprise Extension These business functions are available for full releases of SAP ECC(up to SAP ERP 60) You use them to activate a number of industry-independent andindustry-specific applications and business processes for each business function
uEnterprise Business Functions You use these business functions to activatethe developments for the enhancement packages SAP ERP contains bothindustry-independent and industry-specific enterprise business functions
u Industry business functions These business functions contain functions that belong tothe industry enhancements introduced with SAP ERP 60You cannot activate industry business functions of an industry business functionset parallel to other industry business functions in anABAP-based systeminstanceTherefore some business function sets are available where the requirements of severalindustries are linked with one another for example the SAP Oil and Gas with theUtilitiesbusiness function set
Business functions also provide you with a test catalog which allows you to test new functionalityand its specific documentation
n Business Function Sets The business functions are grouped in business function sets in yourABAP-based ECC system There are two types of business functions setsl General Business Function Set This contains the enterprise business functions and the
Enterprise Extensions These contain functions for the standard applications of AccountingLogistics Human Capital Management and some additional industry-specific applications
l Industry Business Function Set You use this to change your clients of an ECC system overto the applications and solutions tailored for an industry This business function set coversall industry business functions that can be used for an industry solution to be implementedexclusively on one system or one instance
Recommendation
A business function set is activated when you have activated at least one of the related businessfunctions We therefore recommend that you activate the business function set when you startconfiguring your system since the required industry-specific view of your Implementation Guideis only created once you have activated the related business function
n Technical UsageA technical usage refers to a set of product instances All product instances of a technical usagehave to be installed to enable a business function For information on the mapping of the technicalusage to business functions see SAP Note 1324838
1464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Example
l The technical usage Central Application refers to the product instance SAP ECC Server which isan ABAP main instance
l The technical usage Human Capital Management refers to two different product instances thefirst one is Human Capital Management which is an ABAP main instance and the second one isSAP Portal Content which is a JAVA main instance A technical usage tells you which softwarecomponent must be installed in your SAP ERP 60 system The main instance tells youwhere to install it in the ABAP or Java part of your system The technical usage can alsoinclude content for a SAP Portal SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BImdash previously known as SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse or SAP NetWeaver BW)) or SAPNetWeaver Exchange Insfrastructure (SAP NetWeaver XI) system
n Main Instances and Software ComponentsA software component is the smallest maintainable unit within the SAP software model thus thebasis for support packages For installation purposes a software component is assigned to one orseveral product instances All content (BI EP PI content) is shipped as software components
Example
The technical usage Central Application consists of two software components in the above figureEA-APPL 605 and SAP_APPL 605 From a technical point of view both software components mustbe installed to launch the new function New General Ledger Accounting
The product instance (or main instance) comprises a set of software components
Example
The product instance in the above figure is SAP ECC Server which consists of severalapplication-specific software components such as SAP_APPL SAP_HR or EA-Retail
With enhancement packages new or enhanced objects that are contained in special contentproduct instances are shipped The following types of content are availablel Role Content provides a single pointmdashofmdashaccess for SAP business applications reports and
technologies For example it allows a seamless integration of classic SAP GUI-based transactionsand Web Dynpro-based applications There are two different options to run role content
uSAP Netweaver Business Client (NWBC)The NWBC enables you to directly access PFCGroles on the SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP
uSAP Netweaver Enterprise Portal The Enterprise Portal (EP) enables you to run portalroles which are captured in business packages The EP allows an easy integration of JAVAapplications and supports complex multi-system scenarios
12202010 PUBLIC 1564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
l Business Intelligence content (BI content mdash previously known as SAP NetWeaverBusiness Warehouse content or SAP NetWeaver BW content) In your BW system new orchanged objects as of the enhancement packages are stored in own InfoAreas
l SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure content (XI content) and enterprise servicesAs part of the enhancement packages you receive additional enterprise services Theimplementations of these enterprise services are in the software component versions of yourABAP-based system In the XI system these enterprise services are grouped in their ownsoftware components and namespaces for the enhancement packages For more informationabout these enterprise services see the documentation of the business function and therelated release notes
The following figure explains the relationship between business functions technical usage andsoftware components using the business function example HCM Administrative Services 03 You canuse this business function to get the latest functions for HCM processes and formsThe business function HCM Administrative Services 03 is mapped to the technical usage Human CapitalManagement This technical usage requires several product instances such as SAP ECC ServerSAP NW ‒ EP Core and SAP Portal Content As you can see in the figure the technical usagehighlighted in yellow is the only grouping entity stretched across different product instances
Figure 4 Software Architecture SAP ERP ‒ Example Human Capital Management BusinessFunction HCM Administrative Services HCM_ASR_CI_3
From a technical point of view you install software components SAP_HR 605 and EA_HR 605 inyour SAP ECC Server system as well as the related enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70
1664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Business packages related to HCM Administrative Services and portal content are deployed inthe Java part of the SAP NW ‒ EP core system
Industry Business Solutions
As mentioned in the previous chapter [page 9] industry business solutions have been integrated into theSAP ECC Server There are different ways to make the functionality for an industry business solutionavailable SAP ERP therefore distinguishes between the following types of industry business solutions
n Industry business solutions delivered as central component These industry businesssolutions are available immediately after the installation of the product instance SAP ECC youdo not have to activate a business function
n Industry business solutions available as business function set (industry enhancement)Youuse the business function set to activate the industry-specific functions that change your ECCsystem over to the requirements of a specific industry These business function sets are alsoavailable with SAP ECC you do not have to install an add-on
n Industry-specific business processes or industry business solutions delivered as EnterpriseExtension or Enterprise business function
n Industry business solutions delivered as add-on You have to install these industry businesssolutions separately
More Information
n Further details of the relationship between business functions technical usage product instancesand software components are visible in the mapping of business functions to technical usagesSee PDF attachment in the SAP Note 1324838
n The ldquoApplication Operation Guide for SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo containsthe component matrix for ABAP and Java components as well as for additional componentsThe guide is available at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement packages 5 for SAP ERP 60 ldquoSOG SAP enhancement packages5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo
n For more information about the different industries refer to the individual Master Guides for eachindustry You find them at httpservicesapcominstguides Note that the Master Guidesfor the industries cover industry scenarios running in the entire SAP Business Suite not justSAP ERP
n For more information on the individual business functions see wwwhelpsapcom SAP ERPSAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60) Business Functions in SAP ERP
n For more information on roles refer to SAP Note 1522708
12202010 PUBLIC 1764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
The following list summarizes important facts about the enhancement package concept andrecommended approaches
n Install only selected parts of the enhancement package The selection is driven by the functionalneed from a business point of view
n You cannot mix the installation of different enhancement package versions in your ABAP-basedSAP system You can have just one enhancement package version in the SAP system
n SAP enhancement packages are cumulative meaning that each new enhancement packageincludes new innovations of its own as well as all innovations delivered with prior packages
n We recommend installing the latest available enhancement package versionn Install enhancement packages and Support Packages in one single step (this includes the
preconditioned Support Packages)n SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the Support
Package versions of the underlying SAP systemn SAP enhancement packages have the same maintenance period as the underlying core applicationn The installation of an enhancement package is irreversible
n As long as you do not activate a business function the installation of an enhancement packagehas no impact on existing business processes or user interfacesYou can only activate business functions in ABAP-based systems not in Java-based SAP systems
n The activation of most business functions and extension sets is irreversible Only a small numberof business functions is reversibleTest the installation process and activation of new functions in advance on a sandbox systemEnsure that you evaluate the runtime and the SAP system behavior its dependencies and impactsMake sure that your SAP system is free of errors before going live
25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
This chapter provides an overview of the technical changes that are included with the latest availableenhancement package version
n Use of SAP Solution Manager ismandatory Ensure that you have installed SAP SolutionManager SP23 or higher Also ensure that you have correctly defined and maintained yoursystem landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY)As of enhancement package 5 the add-on landscape verification 10 for SAP Solution Manageris available This add-on allows you to identify issues in your SAP Solution Manager landscape(transaction SMSY) before they cause problems for example during a system update Example for
1864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
With SAP ERP you also receive a series of industry business solutions that were formerly delivered asIndustry Solution Add-Ons These add-ons have been integrated into the product instance SAP ECCServer The following industry business solutions are available with SAP ECC 60
n SAP Catch Weight Managementn Defense Forces amp Public Securityn SAP Discrete Industries and Mill Products
n SAP HealthcareSAP Ambulatory Care Managementn SAP for Insurance
n SAP Media
n SAP Miningn SAP Oil amp Gas
n Collection and Disbursement (PSCD)n SAP Retail
n Campus Managementn SAP Telecommunications
n SAP Utilities
n Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable
You can use many of the industry business solutions by activating the corresponding businessfunctions and business function sets You use them to configure your ECC system to therequirements of the industry business solution To find out which business industry solutions youcan use refer to the Product Availability Matrix at httpservicesapcompamFor more information on the different types of industry business solutions see Enhancement Packages andSoftware Components Architecture Overview [page 11]
More InformationFor more information about the SAP ERP 60 technology or about the architecture of theSwitch Framework see the ldquoMaster Guide for SAP ERP 60rdquo on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomerp-instImportant SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 see SAPNote 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
23 Enhancement Packages and Software ComponentsArchitecture Overview
Prior to the availability of the enhancement package delivery architecture it was necessary to upgradethe complete SAP system instance to a new release for example from SAP R3 46C to SAP ERP 60With enhancement packages it is now possible to update individual software components of your
12202010 PUBLIC 1164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
SAP ERP system or to install new software components always based on your choice of technicalusage For example with technical usage ldquoHuman Capital Managementrdquo you can update SAP ERP 60software component SAP_HR 600 and EA-HR 600 to SAP_HR 605 and EA-HR 605
Note
Update only software components that are related to the functions you want to use
SAP ERP 60 ECC Server consists of two different types of software components
n Application-related software components such as SAP_APPL or SAP_HRn SAP NetWeaver-related software components such as SAP_BASIS or SAP_ABA
In this example the application components in the following figure have version 600 (for exampleEA-HR 600) and the Basis (NetWeaver) components have version 700 which is the given situationwith SAP ERP 60 without any enhancement packages After installation of the technical usage Retailselected software components of the application area have been updated to a higher version such asSAP_APPL 605 EA-Retail 605 as well as the NetWeaver component to version 702
Figure 1 Application Components after Installation of Technical Usage Retail
A verification of your own component version can be evaluated by logging into your SAP ERP ABAPsystem and choosing System Status in the menu The Component Information pushbutton displaysthe details In addition each software component has its own support packages which can beimported separately (for each component) or component-wide ‒ using Support Package Stacks Inthis example the software component SAP_HR is on version 605 and Support Package level 1
Figure 2 Example for Component Information
1264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
The business functions and thus the business-related features that you plan to use will dictatewhich software components you must install in your existing system instances The following figurehelps you to understand the relationship between business functions technical usages softwarecomponents and product instances
Figure 3 Example for Mapping Process Relationship Between Technical Usages Business Functionsand Software Components
n Business FunctionThe business functions in an enhancement package define the functional scope which you canactivate and use in the supported business process A business function has two meaningsl It is the business entity that provides information about process enhancements and information
about what you have to install to use those process enhancements All required businessfunctions are summarized in the technical usage
l It is the technical entity in the ABAP instance that can be switched on using the switchframework transaction (SFW5)
Example
The business function 2 New General Ledger Accounting with the technical name FIN_GL_CI_1comprises the enhancements within the new general ledger accounting functions Thisbusiness function is part of the technical usage ldquoCentral Applicationrdquo
12202010 PUBLIC 1364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Note
For SAP ERP transaction SFW5 covers the following three types of business functions
uEnterprise Extension These business functions are available for full releases of SAP ECC(up to SAP ERP 60) You use them to activate a number of industry-independent andindustry-specific applications and business processes for each business function
uEnterprise Business Functions You use these business functions to activatethe developments for the enhancement packages SAP ERP contains bothindustry-independent and industry-specific enterprise business functions
u Industry business functions These business functions contain functions that belong tothe industry enhancements introduced with SAP ERP 60You cannot activate industry business functions of an industry business functionset parallel to other industry business functions in anABAP-based systeminstanceTherefore some business function sets are available where the requirements of severalindustries are linked with one another for example the SAP Oil and Gas with theUtilitiesbusiness function set
Business functions also provide you with a test catalog which allows you to test new functionalityand its specific documentation
n Business Function Sets The business functions are grouped in business function sets in yourABAP-based ECC system There are two types of business functions setsl General Business Function Set This contains the enterprise business functions and the
Enterprise Extensions These contain functions for the standard applications of AccountingLogistics Human Capital Management and some additional industry-specific applications
l Industry Business Function Set You use this to change your clients of an ECC system overto the applications and solutions tailored for an industry This business function set coversall industry business functions that can be used for an industry solution to be implementedexclusively on one system or one instance
Recommendation
A business function set is activated when you have activated at least one of the related businessfunctions We therefore recommend that you activate the business function set when you startconfiguring your system since the required industry-specific view of your Implementation Guideis only created once you have activated the related business function
n Technical UsageA technical usage refers to a set of product instances All product instances of a technical usagehave to be installed to enable a business function For information on the mapping of the technicalusage to business functions see SAP Note 1324838
1464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Example
l The technical usage Central Application refers to the product instance SAP ECC Server which isan ABAP main instance
l The technical usage Human Capital Management refers to two different product instances thefirst one is Human Capital Management which is an ABAP main instance and the second one isSAP Portal Content which is a JAVA main instance A technical usage tells you which softwarecomponent must be installed in your SAP ERP 60 system The main instance tells youwhere to install it in the ABAP or Java part of your system The technical usage can alsoinclude content for a SAP Portal SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BImdash previously known as SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse or SAP NetWeaver BW)) or SAPNetWeaver Exchange Insfrastructure (SAP NetWeaver XI) system
n Main Instances and Software ComponentsA software component is the smallest maintainable unit within the SAP software model thus thebasis for support packages For installation purposes a software component is assigned to one orseveral product instances All content (BI EP PI content) is shipped as software components
Example
The technical usage Central Application consists of two software components in the above figureEA-APPL 605 and SAP_APPL 605 From a technical point of view both software components mustbe installed to launch the new function New General Ledger Accounting
The product instance (or main instance) comprises a set of software components
Example
The product instance in the above figure is SAP ECC Server which consists of severalapplication-specific software components such as SAP_APPL SAP_HR or EA-Retail
With enhancement packages new or enhanced objects that are contained in special contentproduct instances are shipped The following types of content are availablel Role Content provides a single pointmdashofmdashaccess for SAP business applications reports and
technologies For example it allows a seamless integration of classic SAP GUI-based transactionsand Web Dynpro-based applications There are two different options to run role content
uSAP Netweaver Business Client (NWBC)The NWBC enables you to directly access PFCGroles on the SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP
uSAP Netweaver Enterprise Portal The Enterprise Portal (EP) enables you to run portalroles which are captured in business packages The EP allows an easy integration of JAVAapplications and supports complex multi-system scenarios
12202010 PUBLIC 1564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
l Business Intelligence content (BI content mdash previously known as SAP NetWeaverBusiness Warehouse content or SAP NetWeaver BW content) In your BW system new orchanged objects as of the enhancement packages are stored in own InfoAreas
l SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure content (XI content) and enterprise servicesAs part of the enhancement packages you receive additional enterprise services Theimplementations of these enterprise services are in the software component versions of yourABAP-based system In the XI system these enterprise services are grouped in their ownsoftware components and namespaces for the enhancement packages For more informationabout these enterprise services see the documentation of the business function and therelated release notes
The following figure explains the relationship between business functions technical usage andsoftware components using the business function example HCM Administrative Services 03 You canuse this business function to get the latest functions for HCM processes and formsThe business function HCM Administrative Services 03 is mapped to the technical usage Human CapitalManagement This technical usage requires several product instances such as SAP ECC ServerSAP NW ‒ EP Core and SAP Portal Content As you can see in the figure the technical usagehighlighted in yellow is the only grouping entity stretched across different product instances
Figure 4 Software Architecture SAP ERP ‒ Example Human Capital Management BusinessFunction HCM Administrative Services HCM_ASR_CI_3
From a technical point of view you install software components SAP_HR 605 and EA_HR 605 inyour SAP ECC Server system as well as the related enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70
1664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Business packages related to HCM Administrative Services and portal content are deployed inthe Java part of the SAP NW ‒ EP core system
Industry Business Solutions
As mentioned in the previous chapter [page 9] industry business solutions have been integrated into theSAP ECC Server There are different ways to make the functionality for an industry business solutionavailable SAP ERP therefore distinguishes between the following types of industry business solutions
n Industry business solutions delivered as central component These industry businesssolutions are available immediately after the installation of the product instance SAP ECC youdo not have to activate a business function
n Industry business solutions available as business function set (industry enhancement)Youuse the business function set to activate the industry-specific functions that change your ECCsystem over to the requirements of a specific industry These business function sets are alsoavailable with SAP ECC you do not have to install an add-on
n Industry-specific business processes or industry business solutions delivered as EnterpriseExtension or Enterprise business function
n Industry business solutions delivered as add-on You have to install these industry businesssolutions separately
More Information
n Further details of the relationship between business functions technical usage product instancesand software components are visible in the mapping of business functions to technical usagesSee PDF attachment in the SAP Note 1324838
n The ldquoApplication Operation Guide for SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo containsthe component matrix for ABAP and Java components as well as for additional componentsThe guide is available at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement packages 5 for SAP ERP 60 ldquoSOG SAP enhancement packages5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo
n For more information about the different industries refer to the individual Master Guides for eachindustry You find them at httpservicesapcominstguides Note that the Master Guidesfor the industries cover industry scenarios running in the entire SAP Business Suite not justSAP ERP
n For more information on the individual business functions see wwwhelpsapcom SAP ERPSAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60) Business Functions in SAP ERP
n For more information on roles refer to SAP Note 1522708
12202010 PUBLIC 1764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
The following list summarizes important facts about the enhancement package concept andrecommended approaches
n Install only selected parts of the enhancement package The selection is driven by the functionalneed from a business point of view
n You cannot mix the installation of different enhancement package versions in your ABAP-basedSAP system You can have just one enhancement package version in the SAP system
n SAP enhancement packages are cumulative meaning that each new enhancement packageincludes new innovations of its own as well as all innovations delivered with prior packages
n We recommend installing the latest available enhancement package versionn Install enhancement packages and Support Packages in one single step (this includes the
preconditioned Support Packages)n SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the Support
Package versions of the underlying SAP systemn SAP enhancement packages have the same maintenance period as the underlying core applicationn The installation of an enhancement package is irreversible
n As long as you do not activate a business function the installation of an enhancement packagehas no impact on existing business processes or user interfacesYou can only activate business functions in ABAP-based systems not in Java-based SAP systems
n The activation of most business functions and extension sets is irreversible Only a small numberof business functions is reversibleTest the installation process and activation of new functions in advance on a sandbox systemEnsure that you evaluate the runtime and the SAP system behavior its dependencies and impactsMake sure that your SAP system is free of errors before going live
25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
This chapter provides an overview of the technical changes that are included with the latest availableenhancement package version
n Use of SAP Solution Manager ismandatory Ensure that you have installed SAP SolutionManager SP23 or higher Also ensure that you have correctly defined and maintained yoursystem landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY)As of enhancement package 5 the add-on landscape verification 10 for SAP Solution Manageris available This add-on allows you to identify issues in your SAP Solution Manager landscape(transaction SMSY) before they cause problems for example during a system update Example for
1864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
SAP ERP system or to install new software components always based on your choice of technicalusage For example with technical usage ldquoHuman Capital Managementrdquo you can update SAP ERP 60software component SAP_HR 600 and EA-HR 600 to SAP_HR 605 and EA-HR 605
Note
Update only software components that are related to the functions you want to use
SAP ERP 60 ECC Server consists of two different types of software components
n Application-related software components such as SAP_APPL or SAP_HRn SAP NetWeaver-related software components such as SAP_BASIS or SAP_ABA
In this example the application components in the following figure have version 600 (for exampleEA-HR 600) and the Basis (NetWeaver) components have version 700 which is the given situationwith SAP ERP 60 without any enhancement packages After installation of the technical usage Retailselected software components of the application area have been updated to a higher version such asSAP_APPL 605 EA-Retail 605 as well as the NetWeaver component to version 702
Figure 1 Application Components after Installation of Technical Usage Retail
A verification of your own component version can be evaluated by logging into your SAP ERP ABAPsystem and choosing System Status in the menu The Component Information pushbutton displaysthe details In addition each software component has its own support packages which can beimported separately (for each component) or component-wide ‒ using Support Package Stacks Inthis example the software component SAP_HR is on version 605 and Support Package level 1
Figure 2 Example for Component Information
1264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
The business functions and thus the business-related features that you plan to use will dictatewhich software components you must install in your existing system instances The following figurehelps you to understand the relationship between business functions technical usages softwarecomponents and product instances
Figure 3 Example for Mapping Process Relationship Between Technical Usages Business Functionsand Software Components
n Business FunctionThe business functions in an enhancement package define the functional scope which you canactivate and use in the supported business process A business function has two meaningsl It is the business entity that provides information about process enhancements and information
about what you have to install to use those process enhancements All required businessfunctions are summarized in the technical usage
l It is the technical entity in the ABAP instance that can be switched on using the switchframework transaction (SFW5)
Example
The business function 2 New General Ledger Accounting with the technical name FIN_GL_CI_1comprises the enhancements within the new general ledger accounting functions Thisbusiness function is part of the technical usage ldquoCentral Applicationrdquo
12202010 PUBLIC 1364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Note
For SAP ERP transaction SFW5 covers the following three types of business functions
uEnterprise Extension These business functions are available for full releases of SAP ECC(up to SAP ERP 60) You use them to activate a number of industry-independent andindustry-specific applications and business processes for each business function
uEnterprise Business Functions You use these business functions to activatethe developments for the enhancement packages SAP ERP contains bothindustry-independent and industry-specific enterprise business functions
u Industry business functions These business functions contain functions that belong tothe industry enhancements introduced with SAP ERP 60You cannot activate industry business functions of an industry business functionset parallel to other industry business functions in anABAP-based systeminstanceTherefore some business function sets are available where the requirements of severalindustries are linked with one another for example the SAP Oil and Gas with theUtilitiesbusiness function set
Business functions also provide you with a test catalog which allows you to test new functionalityand its specific documentation
n Business Function Sets The business functions are grouped in business function sets in yourABAP-based ECC system There are two types of business functions setsl General Business Function Set This contains the enterprise business functions and the
Enterprise Extensions These contain functions for the standard applications of AccountingLogistics Human Capital Management and some additional industry-specific applications
l Industry Business Function Set You use this to change your clients of an ECC system overto the applications and solutions tailored for an industry This business function set coversall industry business functions that can be used for an industry solution to be implementedexclusively on one system or one instance
Recommendation
A business function set is activated when you have activated at least one of the related businessfunctions We therefore recommend that you activate the business function set when you startconfiguring your system since the required industry-specific view of your Implementation Guideis only created once you have activated the related business function
n Technical UsageA technical usage refers to a set of product instances All product instances of a technical usagehave to be installed to enable a business function For information on the mapping of the technicalusage to business functions see SAP Note 1324838
1464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Example
l The technical usage Central Application refers to the product instance SAP ECC Server which isan ABAP main instance
l The technical usage Human Capital Management refers to two different product instances thefirst one is Human Capital Management which is an ABAP main instance and the second one isSAP Portal Content which is a JAVA main instance A technical usage tells you which softwarecomponent must be installed in your SAP ERP 60 system The main instance tells youwhere to install it in the ABAP or Java part of your system The technical usage can alsoinclude content for a SAP Portal SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BImdash previously known as SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse or SAP NetWeaver BW)) or SAPNetWeaver Exchange Insfrastructure (SAP NetWeaver XI) system
n Main Instances and Software ComponentsA software component is the smallest maintainable unit within the SAP software model thus thebasis for support packages For installation purposes a software component is assigned to one orseveral product instances All content (BI EP PI content) is shipped as software components
Example
The technical usage Central Application consists of two software components in the above figureEA-APPL 605 and SAP_APPL 605 From a technical point of view both software components mustbe installed to launch the new function New General Ledger Accounting
The product instance (or main instance) comprises a set of software components
Example
The product instance in the above figure is SAP ECC Server which consists of severalapplication-specific software components such as SAP_APPL SAP_HR or EA-Retail
With enhancement packages new or enhanced objects that are contained in special contentproduct instances are shipped The following types of content are availablel Role Content provides a single pointmdashofmdashaccess for SAP business applications reports and
technologies For example it allows a seamless integration of classic SAP GUI-based transactionsand Web Dynpro-based applications There are two different options to run role content
uSAP Netweaver Business Client (NWBC)The NWBC enables you to directly access PFCGroles on the SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP
uSAP Netweaver Enterprise Portal The Enterprise Portal (EP) enables you to run portalroles which are captured in business packages The EP allows an easy integration of JAVAapplications and supports complex multi-system scenarios
12202010 PUBLIC 1564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
l Business Intelligence content (BI content mdash previously known as SAP NetWeaverBusiness Warehouse content or SAP NetWeaver BW content) In your BW system new orchanged objects as of the enhancement packages are stored in own InfoAreas
l SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure content (XI content) and enterprise servicesAs part of the enhancement packages you receive additional enterprise services Theimplementations of these enterprise services are in the software component versions of yourABAP-based system In the XI system these enterprise services are grouped in their ownsoftware components and namespaces for the enhancement packages For more informationabout these enterprise services see the documentation of the business function and therelated release notes
The following figure explains the relationship between business functions technical usage andsoftware components using the business function example HCM Administrative Services 03 You canuse this business function to get the latest functions for HCM processes and formsThe business function HCM Administrative Services 03 is mapped to the technical usage Human CapitalManagement This technical usage requires several product instances such as SAP ECC ServerSAP NW ‒ EP Core and SAP Portal Content As you can see in the figure the technical usagehighlighted in yellow is the only grouping entity stretched across different product instances
Figure 4 Software Architecture SAP ERP ‒ Example Human Capital Management BusinessFunction HCM Administrative Services HCM_ASR_CI_3
From a technical point of view you install software components SAP_HR 605 and EA_HR 605 inyour SAP ECC Server system as well as the related enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70
1664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Business packages related to HCM Administrative Services and portal content are deployed inthe Java part of the SAP NW ‒ EP core system
Industry Business Solutions
As mentioned in the previous chapter [page 9] industry business solutions have been integrated into theSAP ECC Server There are different ways to make the functionality for an industry business solutionavailable SAP ERP therefore distinguishes between the following types of industry business solutions
n Industry business solutions delivered as central component These industry businesssolutions are available immediately after the installation of the product instance SAP ECC youdo not have to activate a business function
n Industry business solutions available as business function set (industry enhancement)Youuse the business function set to activate the industry-specific functions that change your ECCsystem over to the requirements of a specific industry These business function sets are alsoavailable with SAP ECC you do not have to install an add-on
n Industry-specific business processes or industry business solutions delivered as EnterpriseExtension or Enterprise business function
n Industry business solutions delivered as add-on You have to install these industry businesssolutions separately
More Information
n Further details of the relationship between business functions technical usage product instancesand software components are visible in the mapping of business functions to technical usagesSee PDF attachment in the SAP Note 1324838
n The ldquoApplication Operation Guide for SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo containsthe component matrix for ABAP and Java components as well as for additional componentsThe guide is available at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement packages 5 for SAP ERP 60 ldquoSOG SAP enhancement packages5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo
n For more information about the different industries refer to the individual Master Guides for eachindustry You find them at httpservicesapcominstguides Note that the Master Guidesfor the industries cover industry scenarios running in the entire SAP Business Suite not justSAP ERP
n For more information on the individual business functions see wwwhelpsapcom SAP ERPSAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60) Business Functions in SAP ERP
n For more information on roles refer to SAP Note 1522708
12202010 PUBLIC 1764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
The following list summarizes important facts about the enhancement package concept andrecommended approaches
n Install only selected parts of the enhancement package The selection is driven by the functionalneed from a business point of view
n You cannot mix the installation of different enhancement package versions in your ABAP-basedSAP system You can have just one enhancement package version in the SAP system
n SAP enhancement packages are cumulative meaning that each new enhancement packageincludes new innovations of its own as well as all innovations delivered with prior packages
n We recommend installing the latest available enhancement package versionn Install enhancement packages and Support Packages in one single step (this includes the
preconditioned Support Packages)n SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the Support
Package versions of the underlying SAP systemn SAP enhancement packages have the same maintenance period as the underlying core applicationn The installation of an enhancement package is irreversible
n As long as you do not activate a business function the installation of an enhancement packagehas no impact on existing business processes or user interfacesYou can only activate business functions in ABAP-based systems not in Java-based SAP systems
n The activation of most business functions and extension sets is irreversible Only a small numberof business functions is reversibleTest the installation process and activation of new functions in advance on a sandbox systemEnsure that you evaluate the runtime and the SAP system behavior its dependencies and impactsMake sure that your SAP system is free of errors before going live
25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
This chapter provides an overview of the technical changes that are included with the latest availableenhancement package version
n Use of SAP Solution Manager ismandatory Ensure that you have installed SAP SolutionManager SP23 or higher Also ensure that you have correctly defined and maintained yoursystem landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY)As of enhancement package 5 the add-on landscape verification 10 for SAP Solution Manageris available This add-on allows you to identify issues in your SAP Solution Manager landscape(transaction SMSY) before they cause problems for example during a system update Example for
1864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
The business functions and thus the business-related features that you plan to use will dictatewhich software components you must install in your existing system instances The following figurehelps you to understand the relationship between business functions technical usages softwarecomponents and product instances
Figure 3 Example for Mapping Process Relationship Between Technical Usages Business Functionsand Software Components
n Business FunctionThe business functions in an enhancement package define the functional scope which you canactivate and use in the supported business process A business function has two meaningsl It is the business entity that provides information about process enhancements and information
about what you have to install to use those process enhancements All required businessfunctions are summarized in the technical usage
l It is the technical entity in the ABAP instance that can be switched on using the switchframework transaction (SFW5)
Example
The business function 2 New General Ledger Accounting with the technical name FIN_GL_CI_1comprises the enhancements within the new general ledger accounting functions Thisbusiness function is part of the technical usage ldquoCentral Applicationrdquo
12202010 PUBLIC 1364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Note
For SAP ERP transaction SFW5 covers the following three types of business functions
uEnterprise Extension These business functions are available for full releases of SAP ECC(up to SAP ERP 60) You use them to activate a number of industry-independent andindustry-specific applications and business processes for each business function
uEnterprise Business Functions You use these business functions to activatethe developments for the enhancement packages SAP ERP contains bothindustry-independent and industry-specific enterprise business functions
u Industry business functions These business functions contain functions that belong tothe industry enhancements introduced with SAP ERP 60You cannot activate industry business functions of an industry business functionset parallel to other industry business functions in anABAP-based systeminstanceTherefore some business function sets are available where the requirements of severalindustries are linked with one another for example the SAP Oil and Gas with theUtilitiesbusiness function set
Business functions also provide you with a test catalog which allows you to test new functionalityand its specific documentation
n Business Function Sets The business functions are grouped in business function sets in yourABAP-based ECC system There are two types of business functions setsl General Business Function Set This contains the enterprise business functions and the
Enterprise Extensions These contain functions for the standard applications of AccountingLogistics Human Capital Management and some additional industry-specific applications
l Industry Business Function Set You use this to change your clients of an ECC system overto the applications and solutions tailored for an industry This business function set coversall industry business functions that can be used for an industry solution to be implementedexclusively on one system or one instance
Recommendation
A business function set is activated when you have activated at least one of the related businessfunctions We therefore recommend that you activate the business function set when you startconfiguring your system since the required industry-specific view of your Implementation Guideis only created once you have activated the related business function
n Technical UsageA technical usage refers to a set of product instances All product instances of a technical usagehave to be installed to enable a business function For information on the mapping of the technicalusage to business functions see SAP Note 1324838
1464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Example
l The technical usage Central Application refers to the product instance SAP ECC Server which isan ABAP main instance
l The technical usage Human Capital Management refers to two different product instances thefirst one is Human Capital Management which is an ABAP main instance and the second one isSAP Portal Content which is a JAVA main instance A technical usage tells you which softwarecomponent must be installed in your SAP ERP 60 system The main instance tells youwhere to install it in the ABAP or Java part of your system The technical usage can alsoinclude content for a SAP Portal SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BImdash previously known as SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse or SAP NetWeaver BW)) or SAPNetWeaver Exchange Insfrastructure (SAP NetWeaver XI) system
n Main Instances and Software ComponentsA software component is the smallest maintainable unit within the SAP software model thus thebasis for support packages For installation purposes a software component is assigned to one orseveral product instances All content (BI EP PI content) is shipped as software components
Example
The technical usage Central Application consists of two software components in the above figureEA-APPL 605 and SAP_APPL 605 From a technical point of view both software components mustbe installed to launch the new function New General Ledger Accounting
The product instance (or main instance) comprises a set of software components
Example
The product instance in the above figure is SAP ECC Server which consists of severalapplication-specific software components such as SAP_APPL SAP_HR or EA-Retail
With enhancement packages new or enhanced objects that are contained in special contentproduct instances are shipped The following types of content are availablel Role Content provides a single pointmdashofmdashaccess for SAP business applications reports and
technologies For example it allows a seamless integration of classic SAP GUI-based transactionsand Web Dynpro-based applications There are two different options to run role content
uSAP Netweaver Business Client (NWBC)The NWBC enables you to directly access PFCGroles on the SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP
uSAP Netweaver Enterprise Portal The Enterprise Portal (EP) enables you to run portalroles which are captured in business packages The EP allows an easy integration of JAVAapplications and supports complex multi-system scenarios
12202010 PUBLIC 1564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
l Business Intelligence content (BI content mdash previously known as SAP NetWeaverBusiness Warehouse content or SAP NetWeaver BW content) In your BW system new orchanged objects as of the enhancement packages are stored in own InfoAreas
l SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure content (XI content) and enterprise servicesAs part of the enhancement packages you receive additional enterprise services Theimplementations of these enterprise services are in the software component versions of yourABAP-based system In the XI system these enterprise services are grouped in their ownsoftware components and namespaces for the enhancement packages For more informationabout these enterprise services see the documentation of the business function and therelated release notes
The following figure explains the relationship between business functions technical usage andsoftware components using the business function example HCM Administrative Services 03 You canuse this business function to get the latest functions for HCM processes and formsThe business function HCM Administrative Services 03 is mapped to the technical usage Human CapitalManagement This technical usage requires several product instances such as SAP ECC ServerSAP NW ‒ EP Core and SAP Portal Content As you can see in the figure the technical usagehighlighted in yellow is the only grouping entity stretched across different product instances
Figure 4 Software Architecture SAP ERP ‒ Example Human Capital Management BusinessFunction HCM Administrative Services HCM_ASR_CI_3
From a technical point of view you install software components SAP_HR 605 and EA_HR 605 inyour SAP ECC Server system as well as the related enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70
1664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Business packages related to HCM Administrative Services and portal content are deployed inthe Java part of the SAP NW ‒ EP core system
Industry Business Solutions
As mentioned in the previous chapter [page 9] industry business solutions have been integrated into theSAP ECC Server There are different ways to make the functionality for an industry business solutionavailable SAP ERP therefore distinguishes between the following types of industry business solutions
n Industry business solutions delivered as central component These industry businesssolutions are available immediately after the installation of the product instance SAP ECC youdo not have to activate a business function
n Industry business solutions available as business function set (industry enhancement)Youuse the business function set to activate the industry-specific functions that change your ECCsystem over to the requirements of a specific industry These business function sets are alsoavailable with SAP ECC you do not have to install an add-on
n Industry-specific business processes or industry business solutions delivered as EnterpriseExtension or Enterprise business function
n Industry business solutions delivered as add-on You have to install these industry businesssolutions separately
More Information
n Further details of the relationship between business functions technical usage product instancesand software components are visible in the mapping of business functions to technical usagesSee PDF attachment in the SAP Note 1324838
n The ldquoApplication Operation Guide for SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo containsthe component matrix for ABAP and Java components as well as for additional componentsThe guide is available at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement packages 5 for SAP ERP 60 ldquoSOG SAP enhancement packages5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo
n For more information about the different industries refer to the individual Master Guides for eachindustry You find them at httpservicesapcominstguides Note that the Master Guidesfor the industries cover industry scenarios running in the entire SAP Business Suite not justSAP ERP
n For more information on the individual business functions see wwwhelpsapcom SAP ERPSAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60) Business Functions in SAP ERP
n For more information on roles refer to SAP Note 1522708
12202010 PUBLIC 1764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
The following list summarizes important facts about the enhancement package concept andrecommended approaches
n Install only selected parts of the enhancement package The selection is driven by the functionalneed from a business point of view
n You cannot mix the installation of different enhancement package versions in your ABAP-basedSAP system You can have just one enhancement package version in the SAP system
n SAP enhancement packages are cumulative meaning that each new enhancement packageincludes new innovations of its own as well as all innovations delivered with prior packages
n We recommend installing the latest available enhancement package versionn Install enhancement packages and Support Packages in one single step (this includes the
preconditioned Support Packages)n SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the Support
Package versions of the underlying SAP systemn SAP enhancement packages have the same maintenance period as the underlying core applicationn The installation of an enhancement package is irreversible
n As long as you do not activate a business function the installation of an enhancement packagehas no impact on existing business processes or user interfacesYou can only activate business functions in ABAP-based systems not in Java-based SAP systems
n The activation of most business functions and extension sets is irreversible Only a small numberof business functions is reversibleTest the installation process and activation of new functions in advance on a sandbox systemEnsure that you evaluate the runtime and the SAP system behavior its dependencies and impactsMake sure that your SAP system is free of errors before going live
25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
This chapter provides an overview of the technical changes that are included with the latest availableenhancement package version
n Use of SAP Solution Manager ismandatory Ensure that you have installed SAP SolutionManager SP23 or higher Also ensure that you have correctly defined and maintained yoursystem landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY)As of enhancement package 5 the add-on landscape verification 10 for SAP Solution Manageris available This add-on allows you to identify issues in your SAP Solution Manager landscape(transaction SMSY) before they cause problems for example during a system update Example for
1864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Note
For SAP ERP transaction SFW5 covers the following three types of business functions
uEnterprise Extension These business functions are available for full releases of SAP ECC(up to SAP ERP 60) You use them to activate a number of industry-independent andindustry-specific applications and business processes for each business function
uEnterprise Business Functions You use these business functions to activatethe developments for the enhancement packages SAP ERP contains bothindustry-independent and industry-specific enterprise business functions
u Industry business functions These business functions contain functions that belong tothe industry enhancements introduced with SAP ERP 60You cannot activate industry business functions of an industry business functionset parallel to other industry business functions in anABAP-based systeminstanceTherefore some business function sets are available where the requirements of severalindustries are linked with one another for example the SAP Oil and Gas with theUtilitiesbusiness function set
Business functions also provide you with a test catalog which allows you to test new functionalityand its specific documentation
n Business Function Sets The business functions are grouped in business function sets in yourABAP-based ECC system There are two types of business functions setsl General Business Function Set This contains the enterprise business functions and the
Enterprise Extensions These contain functions for the standard applications of AccountingLogistics Human Capital Management and some additional industry-specific applications
l Industry Business Function Set You use this to change your clients of an ECC system overto the applications and solutions tailored for an industry This business function set coversall industry business functions that can be used for an industry solution to be implementedexclusively on one system or one instance
Recommendation
A business function set is activated when you have activated at least one of the related businessfunctions We therefore recommend that you activate the business function set when you startconfiguring your system since the required industry-specific view of your Implementation Guideis only created once you have activated the related business function
n Technical UsageA technical usage refers to a set of product instances All product instances of a technical usagehave to be installed to enable a business function For information on the mapping of the technicalusage to business functions see SAP Note 1324838
1464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Example
l The technical usage Central Application refers to the product instance SAP ECC Server which isan ABAP main instance
l The technical usage Human Capital Management refers to two different product instances thefirst one is Human Capital Management which is an ABAP main instance and the second one isSAP Portal Content which is a JAVA main instance A technical usage tells you which softwarecomponent must be installed in your SAP ERP 60 system The main instance tells youwhere to install it in the ABAP or Java part of your system The technical usage can alsoinclude content for a SAP Portal SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BImdash previously known as SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse or SAP NetWeaver BW)) or SAPNetWeaver Exchange Insfrastructure (SAP NetWeaver XI) system
n Main Instances and Software ComponentsA software component is the smallest maintainable unit within the SAP software model thus thebasis for support packages For installation purposes a software component is assigned to one orseveral product instances All content (BI EP PI content) is shipped as software components
Example
The technical usage Central Application consists of two software components in the above figureEA-APPL 605 and SAP_APPL 605 From a technical point of view both software components mustbe installed to launch the new function New General Ledger Accounting
The product instance (or main instance) comprises a set of software components
Example
The product instance in the above figure is SAP ECC Server which consists of severalapplication-specific software components such as SAP_APPL SAP_HR or EA-Retail
With enhancement packages new or enhanced objects that are contained in special contentproduct instances are shipped The following types of content are availablel Role Content provides a single pointmdashofmdashaccess for SAP business applications reports and
technologies For example it allows a seamless integration of classic SAP GUI-based transactionsand Web Dynpro-based applications There are two different options to run role content
uSAP Netweaver Business Client (NWBC)The NWBC enables you to directly access PFCGroles on the SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP
uSAP Netweaver Enterprise Portal The Enterprise Portal (EP) enables you to run portalroles which are captured in business packages The EP allows an easy integration of JAVAapplications and supports complex multi-system scenarios
12202010 PUBLIC 1564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
l Business Intelligence content (BI content mdash previously known as SAP NetWeaverBusiness Warehouse content or SAP NetWeaver BW content) In your BW system new orchanged objects as of the enhancement packages are stored in own InfoAreas
l SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure content (XI content) and enterprise servicesAs part of the enhancement packages you receive additional enterprise services Theimplementations of these enterprise services are in the software component versions of yourABAP-based system In the XI system these enterprise services are grouped in their ownsoftware components and namespaces for the enhancement packages For more informationabout these enterprise services see the documentation of the business function and therelated release notes
The following figure explains the relationship between business functions technical usage andsoftware components using the business function example HCM Administrative Services 03 You canuse this business function to get the latest functions for HCM processes and formsThe business function HCM Administrative Services 03 is mapped to the technical usage Human CapitalManagement This technical usage requires several product instances such as SAP ECC ServerSAP NW ‒ EP Core and SAP Portal Content As you can see in the figure the technical usagehighlighted in yellow is the only grouping entity stretched across different product instances
Figure 4 Software Architecture SAP ERP ‒ Example Human Capital Management BusinessFunction HCM Administrative Services HCM_ASR_CI_3
From a technical point of view you install software components SAP_HR 605 and EA_HR 605 inyour SAP ECC Server system as well as the related enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70
1664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Business packages related to HCM Administrative Services and portal content are deployed inthe Java part of the SAP NW ‒ EP core system
Industry Business Solutions
As mentioned in the previous chapter [page 9] industry business solutions have been integrated into theSAP ECC Server There are different ways to make the functionality for an industry business solutionavailable SAP ERP therefore distinguishes between the following types of industry business solutions
n Industry business solutions delivered as central component These industry businesssolutions are available immediately after the installation of the product instance SAP ECC youdo not have to activate a business function
n Industry business solutions available as business function set (industry enhancement)Youuse the business function set to activate the industry-specific functions that change your ECCsystem over to the requirements of a specific industry These business function sets are alsoavailable with SAP ECC you do not have to install an add-on
n Industry-specific business processes or industry business solutions delivered as EnterpriseExtension or Enterprise business function
n Industry business solutions delivered as add-on You have to install these industry businesssolutions separately
More Information
n Further details of the relationship between business functions technical usage product instancesand software components are visible in the mapping of business functions to technical usagesSee PDF attachment in the SAP Note 1324838
n The ldquoApplication Operation Guide for SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo containsthe component matrix for ABAP and Java components as well as for additional componentsThe guide is available at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement packages 5 for SAP ERP 60 ldquoSOG SAP enhancement packages5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo
n For more information about the different industries refer to the individual Master Guides for eachindustry You find them at httpservicesapcominstguides Note that the Master Guidesfor the industries cover industry scenarios running in the entire SAP Business Suite not justSAP ERP
n For more information on the individual business functions see wwwhelpsapcom SAP ERPSAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60) Business Functions in SAP ERP
n For more information on roles refer to SAP Note 1522708
12202010 PUBLIC 1764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
The following list summarizes important facts about the enhancement package concept andrecommended approaches
n Install only selected parts of the enhancement package The selection is driven by the functionalneed from a business point of view
n You cannot mix the installation of different enhancement package versions in your ABAP-basedSAP system You can have just one enhancement package version in the SAP system
n SAP enhancement packages are cumulative meaning that each new enhancement packageincludes new innovations of its own as well as all innovations delivered with prior packages
n We recommend installing the latest available enhancement package versionn Install enhancement packages and Support Packages in one single step (this includes the
preconditioned Support Packages)n SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the Support
Package versions of the underlying SAP systemn SAP enhancement packages have the same maintenance period as the underlying core applicationn The installation of an enhancement package is irreversible
n As long as you do not activate a business function the installation of an enhancement packagehas no impact on existing business processes or user interfacesYou can only activate business functions in ABAP-based systems not in Java-based SAP systems
n The activation of most business functions and extension sets is irreversible Only a small numberof business functions is reversibleTest the installation process and activation of new functions in advance on a sandbox systemEnsure that you evaluate the runtime and the SAP system behavior its dependencies and impactsMake sure that your SAP system is free of errors before going live
25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
This chapter provides an overview of the technical changes that are included with the latest availableenhancement package version
n Use of SAP Solution Manager ismandatory Ensure that you have installed SAP SolutionManager SP23 or higher Also ensure that you have correctly defined and maintained yoursystem landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY)As of enhancement package 5 the add-on landscape verification 10 for SAP Solution Manageris available This add-on allows you to identify issues in your SAP Solution Manager landscape(transaction SMSY) before they cause problems for example during a system update Example for
1864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Example
l The technical usage Central Application refers to the product instance SAP ECC Server which isan ABAP main instance
l The technical usage Human Capital Management refers to two different product instances thefirst one is Human Capital Management which is an ABAP main instance and the second one isSAP Portal Content which is a JAVA main instance A technical usage tells you which softwarecomponent must be installed in your SAP ERP 60 system The main instance tells youwhere to install it in the ABAP or Java part of your system The technical usage can alsoinclude content for a SAP Portal SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BImdash previously known as SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse or SAP NetWeaver BW)) or SAPNetWeaver Exchange Insfrastructure (SAP NetWeaver XI) system
n Main Instances and Software ComponentsA software component is the smallest maintainable unit within the SAP software model thus thebasis for support packages For installation purposes a software component is assigned to one orseveral product instances All content (BI EP PI content) is shipped as software components
Example
The technical usage Central Application consists of two software components in the above figureEA-APPL 605 and SAP_APPL 605 From a technical point of view both software components mustbe installed to launch the new function New General Ledger Accounting
The product instance (or main instance) comprises a set of software components
Example
The product instance in the above figure is SAP ECC Server which consists of severalapplication-specific software components such as SAP_APPL SAP_HR or EA-Retail
With enhancement packages new or enhanced objects that are contained in special contentproduct instances are shipped The following types of content are availablel Role Content provides a single pointmdashofmdashaccess for SAP business applications reports and
technologies For example it allows a seamless integration of classic SAP GUI-based transactionsand Web Dynpro-based applications There are two different options to run role content
uSAP Netweaver Business Client (NWBC)The NWBC enables you to directly access PFCGroles on the SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP
uSAP Netweaver Enterprise Portal The Enterprise Portal (EP) enables you to run portalroles which are captured in business packages The EP allows an easy integration of JAVAapplications and supports complex multi-system scenarios
12202010 PUBLIC 1564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
l Business Intelligence content (BI content mdash previously known as SAP NetWeaverBusiness Warehouse content or SAP NetWeaver BW content) In your BW system new orchanged objects as of the enhancement packages are stored in own InfoAreas
l SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure content (XI content) and enterprise servicesAs part of the enhancement packages you receive additional enterprise services Theimplementations of these enterprise services are in the software component versions of yourABAP-based system In the XI system these enterprise services are grouped in their ownsoftware components and namespaces for the enhancement packages For more informationabout these enterprise services see the documentation of the business function and therelated release notes
The following figure explains the relationship between business functions technical usage andsoftware components using the business function example HCM Administrative Services 03 You canuse this business function to get the latest functions for HCM processes and formsThe business function HCM Administrative Services 03 is mapped to the technical usage Human CapitalManagement This technical usage requires several product instances such as SAP ECC ServerSAP NW ‒ EP Core and SAP Portal Content As you can see in the figure the technical usagehighlighted in yellow is the only grouping entity stretched across different product instances
Figure 4 Software Architecture SAP ERP ‒ Example Human Capital Management BusinessFunction HCM Administrative Services HCM_ASR_CI_3
From a technical point of view you install software components SAP_HR 605 and EA_HR 605 inyour SAP ECC Server system as well as the related enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70
1664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Business packages related to HCM Administrative Services and portal content are deployed inthe Java part of the SAP NW ‒ EP core system
Industry Business Solutions
As mentioned in the previous chapter [page 9] industry business solutions have been integrated into theSAP ECC Server There are different ways to make the functionality for an industry business solutionavailable SAP ERP therefore distinguishes between the following types of industry business solutions
n Industry business solutions delivered as central component These industry businesssolutions are available immediately after the installation of the product instance SAP ECC youdo not have to activate a business function
n Industry business solutions available as business function set (industry enhancement)Youuse the business function set to activate the industry-specific functions that change your ECCsystem over to the requirements of a specific industry These business function sets are alsoavailable with SAP ECC you do not have to install an add-on
n Industry-specific business processes or industry business solutions delivered as EnterpriseExtension or Enterprise business function
n Industry business solutions delivered as add-on You have to install these industry businesssolutions separately
More Information
n Further details of the relationship between business functions technical usage product instancesand software components are visible in the mapping of business functions to technical usagesSee PDF attachment in the SAP Note 1324838
n The ldquoApplication Operation Guide for SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo containsthe component matrix for ABAP and Java components as well as for additional componentsThe guide is available at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement packages 5 for SAP ERP 60 ldquoSOG SAP enhancement packages5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo
n For more information about the different industries refer to the individual Master Guides for eachindustry You find them at httpservicesapcominstguides Note that the Master Guidesfor the industries cover industry scenarios running in the entire SAP Business Suite not justSAP ERP
n For more information on the individual business functions see wwwhelpsapcom SAP ERPSAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60) Business Functions in SAP ERP
n For more information on roles refer to SAP Note 1522708
12202010 PUBLIC 1764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
The following list summarizes important facts about the enhancement package concept andrecommended approaches
n Install only selected parts of the enhancement package The selection is driven by the functionalneed from a business point of view
n You cannot mix the installation of different enhancement package versions in your ABAP-basedSAP system You can have just one enhancement package version in the SAP system
n SAP enhancement packages are cumulative meaning that each new enhancement packageincludes new innovations of its own as well as all innovations delivered with prior packages
n We recommend installing the latest available enhancement package versionn Install enhancement packages and Support Packages in one single step (this includes the
preconditioned Support Packages)n SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the Support
Package versions of the underlying SAP systemn SAP enhancement packages have the same maintenance period as the underlying core applicationn The installation of an enhancement package is irreversible
n As long as you do not activate a business function the installation of an enhancement packagehas no impact on existing business processes or user interfacesYou can only activate business functions in ABAP-based systems not in Java-based SAP systems
n The activation of most business functions and extension sets is irreversible Only a small numberof business functions is reversibleTest the installation process and activation of new functions in advance on a sandbox systemEnsure that you evaluate the runtime and the SAP system behavior its dependencies and impactsMake sure that your SAP system is free of errors before going live
25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
This chapter provides an overview of the technical changes that are included with the latest availableenhancement package version
n Use of SAP Solution Manager ismandatory Ensure that you have installed SAP SolutionManager SP23 or higher Also ensure that you have correctly defined and maintained yoursystem landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY)As of enhancement package 5 the add-on landscape verification 10 for SAP Solution Manageris available This add-on allows you to identify issues in your SAP Solution Manager landscape(transaction SMSY) before they cause problems for example during a system update Example for
1864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
l Business Intelligence content (BI content mdash previously known as SAP NetWeaverBusiness Warehouse content or SAP NetWeaver BW content) In your BW system new orchanged objects as of the enhancement packages are stored in own InfoAreas
l SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure content (XI content) and enterprise servicesAs part of the enhancement packages you receive additional enterprise services Theimplementations of these enterprise services are in the software component versions of yourABAP-based system In the XI system these enterprise services are grouped in their ownsoftware components and namespaces for the enhancement packages For more informationabout these enterprise services see the documentation of the business function and therelated release notes
The following figure explains the relationship between business functions technical usage andsoftware components using the business function example HCM Administrative Services 03 You canuse this business function to get the latest functions for HCM processes and formsThe business function HCM Administrative Services 03 is mapped to the technical usage Human CapitalManagement This technical usage requires several product instances such as SAP ECC ServerSAP NW ‒ EP Core and SAP Portal Content As you can see in the figure the technical usagehighlighted in yellow is the only grouping entity stretched across different product instances
Figure 4 Software Architecture SAP ERP ‒ Example Human Capital Management BusinessFunction HCM Administrative Services HCM_ASR_CI_3
From a technical point of view you install software components SAP_HR 605 and EA_HR 605 inyour SAP ECC Server system as well as the related enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70
1664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Business packages related to HCM Administrative Services and portal content are deployed inthe Java part of the SAP NW ‒ EP core system
Industry Business Solutions
As mentioned in the previous chapter [page 9] industry business solutions have been integrated into theSAP ECC Server There are different ways to make the functionality for an industry business solutionavailable SAP ERP therefore distinguishes between the following types of industry business solutions
n Industry business solutions delivered as central component These industry businesssolutions are available immediately after the installation of the product instance SAP ECC youdo not have to activate a business function
n Industry business solutions available as business function set (industry enhancement)Youuse the business function set to activate the industry-specific functions that change your ECCsystem over to the requirements of a specific industry These business function sets are alsoavailable with SAP ECC you do not have to install an add-on
n Industry-specific business processes or industry business solutions delivered as EnterpriseExtension or Enterprise business function
n Industry business solutions delivered as add-on You have to install these industry businesssolutions separately
More Information
n Further details of the relationship between business functions technical usage product instancesand software components are visible in the mapping of business functions to technical usagesSee PDF attachment in the SAP Note 1324838
n The ldquoApplication Operation Guide for SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo containsthe component matrix for ABAP and Java components as well as for additional componentsThe guide is available at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement packages 5 for SAP ERP 60 ldquoSOG SAP enhancement packages5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo
n For more information about the different industries refer to the individual Master Guides for eachindustry You find them at httpservicesapcominstguides Note that the Master Guidesfor the industries cover industry scenarios running in the entire SAP Business Suite not justSAP ERP
n For more information on the individual business functions see wwwhelpsapcom SAP ERPSAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60) Business Functions in SAP ERP
n For more information on roles refer to SAP Note 1522708
12202010 PUBLIC 1764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
The following list summarizes important facts about the enhancement package concept andrecommended approaches
n Install only selected parts of the enhancement package The selection is driven by the functionalneed from a business point of view
n You cannot mix the installation of different enhancement package versions in your ABAP-basedSAP system You can have just one enhancement package version in the SAP system
n SAP enhancement packages are cumulative meaning that each new enhancement packageincludes new innovations of its own as well as all innovations delivered with prior packages
n We recommend installing the latest available enhancement package versionn Install enhancement packages and Support Packages in one single step (this includes the
preconditioned Support Packages)n SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the Support
Package versions of the underlying SAP systemn SAP enhancement packages have the same maintenance period as the underlying core applicationn The installation of an enhancement package is irreversible
n As long as you do not activate a business function the installation of an enhancement packagehas no impact on existing business processes or user interfacesYou can only activate business functions in ABAP-based systems not in Java-based SAP systems
n The activation of most business functions and extension sets is irreversible Only a small numberof business functions is reversibleTest the installation process and activation of new functions in advance on a sandbox systemEnsure that you evaluate the runtime and the SAP system behavior its dependencies and impactsMake sure that your SAP system is free of errors before going live
25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
This chapter provides an overview of the technical changes that are included with the latest availableenhancement package version
n Use of SAP Solution Manager ismandatory Ensure that you have installed SAP SolutionManager SP23 or higher Also ensure that you have correctly defined and maintained yoursystem landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY)As of enhancement package 5 the add-on landscape verification 10 for SAP Solution Manageris available This add-on allows you to identify issues in your SAP Solution Manager landscape(transaction SMSY) before they cause problems for example during a system update Example for
1864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP23 Enhancement Packages and Software Components Architecture Overview
Business packages related to HCM Administrative Services and portal content are deployed inthe Java part of the SAP NW ‒ EP core system
Industry Business Solutions
As mentioned in the previous chapter [page 9] industry business solutions have been integrated into theSAP ECC Server There are different ways to make the functionality for an industry business solutionavailable SAP ERP therefore distinguishes between the following types of industry business solutions
n Industry business solutions delivered as central component These industry businesssolutions are available immediately after the installation of the product instance SAP ECC youdo not have to activate a business function
n Industry business solutions available as business function set (industry enhancement)Youuse the business function set to activate the industry-specific functions that change your ECCsystem over to the requirements of a specific industry These business function sets are alsoavailable with SAP ECC you do not have to install an add-on
n Industry-specific business processes or industry business solutions delivered as EnterpriseExtension or Enterprise business function
n Industry business solutions delivered as add-on You have to install these industry businesssolutions separately
More Information
n Further details of the relationship between business functions technical usage product instancesand software components are visible in the mapping of business functions to technical usagesSee PDF attachment in the SAP Note 1324838
n The ldquoApplication Operation Guide for SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo containsthe component matrix for ABAP and Java components as well as for additional componentsThe guide is available at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement packages 5 for SAP ERP 60 ldquoSOG SAP enhancement packages5 for SAP ERP 60rdquo
n For more information about the different industries refer to the individual Master Guides for eachindustry You find them at httpservicesapcominstguides Note that the Master Guidesfor the industries cover industry scenarios running in the entire SAP Business Suite not justSAP ERP
n For more information on the individual business functions see wwwhelpsapcom SAP ERPSAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60) Business Functions in SAP ERP
n For more information on roles refer to SAP Note 1522708
12202010 PUBLIC 1764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
The following list summarizes important facts about the enhancement package concept andrecommended approaches
n Install only selected parts of the enhancement package The selection is driven by the functionalneed from a business point of view
n You cannot mix the installation of different enhancement package versions in your ABAP-basedSAP system You can have just one enhancement package version in the SAP system
n SAP enhancement packages are cumulative meaning that each new enhancement packageincludes new innovations of its own as well as all innovations delivered with prior packages
n We recommend installing the latest available enhancement package versionn Install enhancement packages and Support Packages in one single step (this includes the
preconditioned Support Packages)n SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the Support
Package versions of the underlying SAP systemn SAP enhancement packages have the same maintenance period as the underlying core applicationn The installation of an enhancement package is irreversible
n As long as you do not activate a business function the installation of an enhancement packagehas no impact on existing business processes or user interfacesYou can only activate business functions in ABAP-based systems not in Java-based SAP systems
n The activation of most business functions and extension sets is irreversible Only a small numberof business functions is reversibleTest the installation process and activation of new functions in advance on a sandbox systemEnsure that you evaluate the runtime and the SAP system behavior its dependencies and impactsMake sure that your SAP system is free of errors before going live
25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
This chapter provides an overview of the technical changes that are included with the latest availableenhancement package version
n Use of SAP Solution Manager ismandatory Ensure that you have installed SAP SolutionManager SP23 or higher Also ensure that you have correctly defined and maintained yoursystem landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY)As of enhancement package 5 the add-on landscape verification 10 for SAP Solution Manageris available This add-on allows you to identify issues in your SAP Solution Manager landscape(transaction SMSY) before they cause problems for example during a system update Example for
1864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
24 Key Facts About Enhancement Packages
The following list summarizes important facts about the enhancement package concept andrecommended approaches
n Install only selected parts of the enhancement package The selection is driven by the functionalneed from a business point of view
n You cannot mix the installation of different enhancement package versions in your ABAP-basedSAP system You can have just one enhancement package version in the SAP system
n SAP enhancement packages are cumulative meaning that each new enhancement packageincludes new innovations of its own as well as all innovations delivered with prior packages
n We recommend installing the latest available enhancement package versionn Install enhancement packages and Support Packages in one single step (this includes the
preconditioned Support Packages)n SAP enhancement packages have Support Packages of their own that are equivalent to the Support
Package versions of the underlying SAP systemn SAP enhancement packages have the same maintenance period as the underlying core applicationn The installation of an enhancement package is irreversible
n As long as you do not activate a business function the installation of an enhancement packagehas no impact on existing business processes or user interfacesYou can only activate business functions in ABAP-based systems not in Java-based SAP systems
n The activation of most business functions and extension sets is irreversible Only a small numberof business functions is reversibleTest the installation process and activation of new functions in advance on a sandbox systemEnsure that you evaluate the runtime and the SAP system behavior its dependencies and impactsMake sure that your SAP system is free of errors before going live
25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
This chapter provides an overview of the technical changes that are included with the latest availableenhancement package version
n Use of SAP Solution Manager ismandatory Ensure that you have installed SAP SolutionManager SP23 or higher Also ensure that you have correctly defined and maintained yoursystem landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY)As of enhancement package 5 the add-on landscape verification 10 for SAP Solution Manageris available This add-on allows you to identify issues in your SAP Solution Manager landscape(transaction SMSY) before they cause problems for example during a system update Example for
1864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
errors are a missing connection to the System Landscape Directory or the wrong assignment of productsto technical systems For each type of error a generic description how to solve it is provided
Recommendation
Before installing the enhancement package we recommend that you install the landscapeverification add-on to check your landscape set-up and data (transaction SMSY) and to correct it ifnecessary
n Business Process Change Analyzer (BPCA) available as of Solution Manager 70 EHP1 TheBPCA allows you to identify critical business processes affected by planned change events Itsupports you to decide on support packages enhancement packages or custom-triggered changesfor your SAP system
Note
For enhancement packages you can use the BPCA only if you work with defined businessprocesses and have created a technical bill of material for each relevant process step
n Direct installation of add-ons In the Design Phase and when usingMaintenance Optimizer (transactionMOPZ) you can directly install add-ons You can select or deselect individual add-ons
Note
It is possible to skip this selection of add-ons and to perform this selection at a later point ina separate step
n The SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi) has been extended with new and optimizedfeatures You use SAP Enhancement Package Installer in the following two casesl Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System [page 33]l Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Package [page 35]The following table briefly describes each of the new features
Area Feature Description
Handling and Usability Observer Mode With this functionality you canenable additional authorizedcolleagues to have read-onlyaccess to the updateupgradetools If necessary you can takeover control to perform theupdateupgrade procedure
12202010 PUBLIC 1964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP25 Technical Changes with SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
Handling and Usability Alerting The alerting enables authorizedcolleagues to get informedvia short message service(SMS) or email as soon asthe updateupgrade procedurerequires input or action
Handling and Usability GUI Reconnect The GUI reconnectsautomatically to the systemlandscape controller withouthaving to restart the systemlandscape controller This isnecessary if the connectionbetween the Upgrade GUI and theSL controller was broken
Stability and Robustness Consistency Check for stackxml The consistency check of theconfiguration file stackxml isnowdone in an earlier phase of theprocedure during the RoadmapStep Extraction This allows you todetect inconsistencies earlier andto even them out
Runtime Reduction Improved Cloning Procedure The cloning procedure ofclient-dependent tables (client100) has been shortened and theparallelization to up to nine batchprocesses has been improved Thisalso leads to a reduction of therequired disk space
Runtime Reduction Health Check This feature allows you to checkthe status of the system andprovides you with a list of all SAPNotes which are missing in thesystem for you to perform theinstallation with SAPehpi
Downtime Reduction Improved After Import Methods The review of after importmethods (AIM) will save up to50 of downtime for EHP5
Downtime Reduction External table conversionparallelized
There is a faster procedureavailable for the parallelization ofexternal table conversion duringthe PARMVNT_XCNV phase
n For the standard upgrade tool (SAPup) SAP produced a new ECC Server export comprisingthe following AS ABAP 702 ECC Server 60 and the technical usage Central Applications Usingthis export you are able to create a real EHP5 system by installation or upgrade directly andwithout further inclusion of EHP5 parts Beneath AS ABAP 702 it comprises the EHP5 components
2064 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605 as well as SAP_BS_FND 702 and WEBCUIF 701 (Forcomparison with EHP4 a customer had to select at least one additional technical usage during theupgrade or after the installation to reach a valid EHP system status)
Note
The standard upgrade tool is used if you upgrade to SAP ERP 60 and include an enhancementpackage For further information on this process see Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation [page 36]
More Information
n Important SAP Notes that need to be considered when installing an enhancement package aresummarized in the release information SAP Note 1323537 and in SAP Note 1484460For more information about the limitations for SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 seeSAP Note 998833 ‒ Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 ‒ Enhancement Packages
n For further details on the landscape verification for Solution Manager refer to theComponent Installation Guide for ERP at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
For enhancement package versions prior to SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 60 theunderlying SAP NetWeaver 70 release level of SAP ERP remained unchanged As of SAP enhancementpackage 4 for SAP ERP 60 enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70 are available Over timedifferent enhancement package versions will be available for both SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver anddependencies are possible The current enhancement package supports different system landscapealternatives The following landscape options exist
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 70701Using this option all NetWeaver hub systems (based on AS JAVA or AS ABAP) remain on theircurrent state (for example SAP NetWeaver 70) Only the SAP ERP 60 instance (based on usagetype AS ABAP) is updated to SAP NetWeaver 70 EHP2
12202010 PUBLIC 2164
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 5
n NetWeaver Hubs on SAP NW 702Using this option you install the latest available enhancement package for SAP NetWeaver 70 inall system instances based on usage type AS ABAP and usage type AS Java Keep in mind that theinstallation of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 always includes enhancement package2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 on usage type AS ABAP
Note
As of Business Suite 7 you can no longer install dual-stack application systems (ABAP and Java) Ifyou want to use both SAP Business Suite ABAP and Java components in your system landscapeyou have to proceed as follows1 Install a separate ABAP-based SAP Business Suite system2 Install the required Java components in a separate Java-based SAP system3 Configure the connection of the Java-based SAP system to the ABAP-based SAP Business
Suite backend systemNew installations do not allow dual-stack systems In an upgrade case dualstack systems are still possible For information about dual stack deployment seehttpwwwsdnsapcomirjsdnlandscapedesign Distribution Models Deployment
Recommendations DualStack Recommendation
2264 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP26 Installation Options with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 6 Sample System Landscape with Installation Option EHP5 for SAP ERP 60NW 70 2mdashExample
Note
For SAP ERP 60 dual stack systems an update of the AS ABAP and AS Java components to EHP2 forNetWeaver 70 is required
Note
Product instances BI Java and SAP XECO are included in the product versions SAP ERP 60 and EHP5FOR SAP ERP 60 NW 702
You use the different product instances to build system landscapes and the individual systeminstances Which system instances you need to make available in your system landscape depends onthe functional scope and therefore the generic business processes or role-based work centers thatyou intend to support
Note
The SAP ERP process Group Close requires systems with the product instances SAP NW ‒ EP CoreSAP NW - Business Intelligence and SAP SEM
The enhancement packages include several new software component versions These softwarecomponents run in different general product instances
12202010 PUBLIC 2364
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Note
A business function is available related to the generic business process Group Close For this businessfunction you need to make a higher version of SAP SEM available Alternatively you can installthe technical usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt in a SAP ECC System
In some cases product instances from product version SAP ERP 60 are required to enable thecomplete functional scope of a specific generic business process or enhancement package feature
More Information
n Guides are available that describe the installation of enhancement packages for SAP NetWeaver 70For more information see SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstallnw70
n For information about functional changes and enhancements see the Release Information SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAPenhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver Whatrsquos New - Release Notes
n Installation and functional dependencies between AS ABAP and AS JAVA enhancement packageinstallation are visible in the Upgrade Dependency Analyzer tool on SAP Service Marketplaceat httpservicesapcomuda
n For general information on the system landscape see Tools and Resources for Planning Your SystemLandscape [page 45] or refer to the Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation athttpservicesapcominstguides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP
enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 60
27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
271 Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
SAPacutes delivery on SOA (service-oriented architecture) differs from the pure architectural conceptof SOA in the delivery of ready-to use enterprise services Enterprise services are SAP-defined Webservices which provide end-to-end business processes or individual business process steps that canbe used to compose business scenarios while ensuring business integrity and ease of reuse SAPdesigns and implements enterprise service interfaces to ensure semantic harmonization and businessrelevance This section deals with the service-enablement of SAP Business Suite 7
2711 Service Enablement
The service enablement of SAP Business Suite consists of one or more of the following SAPcomponents
2464 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP Business Suite 7Enterprise services are an integral part of the software components of the SAP Business Suiteapplications Enterprise services are the technical interfaces to the functionality available in thebusiness application
n SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or higherSAP NetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) is an open integration and applicationplatform that provides tools enabling you to set up a service-oriented architecture for businessapplications You can use the platform for providing discovering and consuming servicesintegrating applications using the integration server and managing business processes Processintegration is required in a runtime environment to consume enterprise services in a mediatedscenario
Note
Most asynchronous services can only be consumed in a mediated scenario
n Enterprise Services RepositoryThe Enterprise Services Repository (ES Repository) is the central repository that contains thedefinition of all enterprise services and models ES Repository is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI71 and with SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higher The Enterprise Services Repository is a design timeenvironment that enables you to create and enhance enterprise service definitions and to viewenterprise service models
Note
In a SAP NetWeaver 70 landscape you will require the Integration Repository to create andenhance enterprise service definitions in a design time environment
n SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherThe SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment (SAP NetWeaver CE) provides a robustenvironment for the design and implementation of composite applicationsThe design time environment of SAP NetWeaver CE can be used for the model-driven design anddevelopment of composite applications based on enterprise services SAP NetWeaver CE offersthe tools and the environment necessary for running composite applications fast and efficientlyin a runtime environment
n SAP Solution Manager 70The Solution Composer shipped with SAP Solution Manager 70 is required to host the enterpriseservice online documentation
n Services RegistryThe Services Registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and SAP NetWeaver CE 71 or higherand is required for the publication of enterprise service end-points (Web services) that have beenconfigured and activated in the SAP Business Suite
12202010 PUBLIC 2564
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Figure 7 Overview SAPrsquos Applications for SOA Enablement
The following table describes the SAP applications required or recommended for different runtimeand design time use cases
SAP Applications
SAP BusinessSuite
SAPNetWeaverPI 70(IntegrationRepository)
SAPNetWeaverPI 71 (ESRepository)
SAPNetWeaverCE 71 (ESRepository)
SAP SolutionManager 70(SolutionComposer)
SAPNetWeaver71 ServicesRegistry
Runtime Usage
EnterpriseServiceProvisioning
Required Optional
Process inte-gration andmediatedcommuni-cation
One option required
Design Time Usage
Create andenhanceenterpriseservicedefinitions
Required One option required Recom-mended
2664 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
Viewenterpriseservicemodels
One Option Required Recom-mended
Design anddevelopcompositeapplications
Required Recom-mended
Recom-mended
Enterpriseservice onlinedocumenta-tion
Required
Publicationsof enterpriseserviceend-points
Optional Required
2712 Installation of the Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA)
The installation of service interfaces and therefore the service enablement of SAP Business Suiteconsists of one or more of the following phases
n Identification of software components and required business functionsYou use the technical data section of the enterprise service documentation to identify thefollowing data for each enterprise servicel the software component version with which the service was shippedl the business function(s) required to be activated
n Identification of technical usagesSAP Note 1324838 provides a mapping of business functions and software component versions totechnical usages You use this documentation to identify the required technical usages for your listof software component versions and business functions
n Installation of the software component ECC-SEThe software component ECC-SE contains service implementations for ECC (the ERP CentralComponent) This component must be explicitly installed if you intend to use enterprise servicesfor ECC functionality In this case you must also select the technical usage ldquoESA ECC-SErdquo duringthe enhancement package installation
n Selection and installation together with the other parts of the enhancement packageIn the enhancement package installation process you must select all the technical usages you haveidentified for service enablement together with the technical usages you identified for enhancedfeatures in SAP Business Suite The selected technical usages will install the correspondingsoftware components that contain the enterprise services interfaces and implementations
12202010 PUBLIC 2764
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n Enterprise service definitions for SAP NetWeaver PI 70 or ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service definitions you must select the technicalusage ldquoXI Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for both SAP NetWeaver 70 and 71 versions Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpzfiles corresponding to your SAP NetWeaver version into the import directory of your IntegrationRepository (for SAP NetWeaver PI 70) or Enterprise Services Repository (for SAP NetWeaver ESRepository 71) Use the import function to import the content files into the correspondingrepository (Integration Repository or Enterprise Services Repository) (Choose Tools ImportDesign Objects )
n Enterprise service models for ES Repository (SAP NetWeaver 71) (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service models you must select the technicalusage ldquoESR Contentrdquo in the enhancement package installation process This usage type downloadsthe content files for SAPNetWeaver ES Repository 71 Unpack the ZIP file and copy the tpz files intothe import directory of your Enterprise Services Repository Use the import function to importthe content files into the Enterprise Services Repository (Choose Tools Import design objects )
Note
The enterprise service models are not available for the Integration Repository (SAP NetWeaverPI 70)
n Enterprise service online documentation for Solution Composer (optional)To install the content required for the enterprise service online documentation you mustdownload the content file for the corresponding Business Suite application product version fromthe Service Marketplace Then you must import the content file into your Solution ComposerRefer to SAP Note 1224284 for further information
n Services Registry (optional)The services registry is shipped with SAP NetWeaver PI 71 and CE 71 You must install the servicesregistry and then publish the enterprise services from the Business Suite application to the registryusing the transaction SOAMANAGER in the backendFor further information regarding the installation of SAP NetWeaver PI CE and ES Repositoryrefer to the corresponding SAP NetWeaver Installation and Master Guides
2713 Related Documentation
For more information about the service-oriented architecture (SOA) see the following informationsources
n SDN Community in the SAP Network at httpswwwsdnsapcomirjsdnsoa (registrationrequired)
2864 PUBLIC 12202010
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n The SAP Enterprise Service Workplace at httpESWorkplacesapcomn The Enterprise Services Wiki in the SAP Network at httpswikisdnsapcomwikixLQ0
(registration required)n SAP Note 1224284 Enterprise Services Installing and Accessing the SOA Documentationn SAP Note 1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterprise servicesn SAP note 838402 Problems with non-Unicode system landscapes
272 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects
The integration of SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius in SAPBusiness Suite provides you with analysis functions that are integrated in the user interface andprocesses Embedded AnalyticsPredefined reports and dashboards provide a detailed graphical or interactive display of (transaction)data from SAP Business Suite or from SAP NetWeaver BWEmbedded Analytics contains the following integrations
n Crystal Reports as an alternative for displaying simple lists in SAP GUI ALV Grid Web DynproABAP ALV and POWER list (not in SAP CRM)
n Crystal Reports for the formatted display of data from queriesn Xcelsius for the graphical or interactive display of data from queries in dashboards
Users can call these functions in SAP NetWeaver Business Client SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP CRMTechnical Requirements
n Crystal Reports for Displaying Simple ListsYou require Crystal Reports Viewer for Business Suite Applications 10 or higher Note thecorresponding license terms
n Crystal Reports with QueriesTo display the Crystal Reports provided you require SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 31 (SP02)and SAP BusinessObjects Integration for SAP XI 31 (SP02) Note the corresponding license termsfor SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own Crystal Reports you require Crystal Reports 2008 V1 (SP02) Note thecorresponding license terms
n Xcelsius Dashboards with QueriesTo display the Xcelsius dashboards provided you require Adobe Flash Player version 9 You mustalso check the license terms for SAP BusinessObjectsTo create your own dashboards you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03FP1) Note the corresponding license terms for SAP BusinessObjects
For displaying data from queries via the predefined content the following system requirementsalso apply
n SAP NetWeaver 70 including enhancement package 2 (SP04)
12202010 PUBLIC 2964
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
2 SAP Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP27 System-Wide Solutions and Third-Party Software
n SAP NetWeaver 70 BI Content Add-On 5
n Extension for SAP NetWeaver 702 BI Content Add-On 5
More InformationFor more information about the different topics see the information sources in the following table
Topic Information Source
General Information SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom underSAP ERP or SAP CRM Processes and Tools for Enterprise
Applications (CA-EPT) Embedded Analytics
Installation Information SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcombosap-instguides and
SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAPBusinessObjects All Products
Configuration Information SAP Solution Manager under SolutionsApplicationsBasic Configuration Embedded Analytics
Installation Instructions SAP Notes 1353044 (Crystal Reports Viewer for Business SuiteApplications 10) and 1345320 (Crystal Reports with Queries)
3064 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package
3 Installation of an EnhancementPackage
31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
This chapter provides you with a detailed overview of the implementation procedure of anenhancement package In general there are three different scenarios possible based on the customersrsquosituation
n Enhancement package installation in an exisiting SAP ERP 60 systemn New installation of an SAP System with enhancement packagesn Upgrade to an SAP ERP 60 system including an Enhancement Package installation
All three options are described in more detail in separate sub-chaptersThe majority of customers will install enhancement packages in an existing SAP ERP 60 system Thefirst section of this chapter therefore focuses on the phases relevant for customers in this scenarioTo facilitate your implementation procedure SAP has introduced an application lifecyclemanagement process for the implementation of an enhancement packageThe following figure shows the different steps of the enhancement package installation procedureAbove each process phase are the user profiles that apply to the solution phase SAP also providesfurther information such as documentation notes and guides for each single step Links to thisinformation are listed in the detailed process description in the following chapters
Figure 8 SAP Enhancement Package Lifecycle mdash Example
12202010 PUBLIC 3164
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package31 Implementation Procedure at a Glance
The SAP enhancement package implementation procedure can run as follows
Requirements Phase mdash Discovering New EHP Functionality
The Requirements phase is the general starting point for any kind of enhancement packageinstallation project regardless of whether you are including enhancement packages within anupgrade project or if you are planning a maintenance cycle with SAP enhancement packages Thedetailed definition of your requirements is the key success factor for a smooth project You discovernew developments and functions to find out which solution best suits your needs The Requirementsphase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the enhancements relevant for youn Understand their potential business benefitn Assess the effort and impact of their implementationn Decide on the relevant business functions
These tasks are usually performed by business process champions technical operations or the ProjectManagement OfficeTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the EHP Info Center and the SAPSolution Browser For further information on how to access these refer to the chapter on RelatedDocumentation [page 37]
Design Phase mdash Business and Technical Aspects
The Design phase covers the business aspects as well as the technical aspects of your implementationThe Design phase consists of the following tasks
n Identify the relevant technical usage for the enhancement packagen Perform the selective installation
Note
The selective installation of enhancement packages allows you to update a subset of thesoftware components that are part of your SAP ERP 60 implementation For example you arenow able to update parts of your SAP ECC Server Your selection of software components isdriven by the functional enhancements you plan to implement You first identify the businessfunctions and map them to the corresponding technical usages The benefit of this approach is arisk reduction for your implementation project since fewer software components are touched
n Check the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies such as the latest version of SAPSolution Manager latest installation or upgrade tools or the compatibility of add-ons
These tasks are usually performed by technical operationsTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are the Business Blueprint theimplementation content and the Maintenance Optimizer For further information on how to accessthese refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
3264 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Build and Test Phase mdash Installation and Configuration
During the Build and Test phase you install and configure your enhancement package Preparingthe technical installation starts with the Solution Manager preparation followed by identifying theAdd-on handling and further technical checks Overall in this phase you deal with the followingtasks
n Download and install the enhancement packagen Adjust modifications (SPDDSPAU) and execute a regression testn Activate the new business functions and configure the new capabilitiesn Perform an acceptance test and train the affected end-users
Note
If you have modified SAP code in your system do not separate the installation of the Support Packagestack and the installation of the SAP enhancement package into two steps This would mean havingto perform the modification adjustment twice (and partially for the same objects)
These tasks are usually performed by technical operations application management customdevelopment or key users in your organizationTools and sources of information to support you in this phase are SAP Solution Manager and theinstallation tools To support you in your test phase the test catalog supports you with test cases Forfurther information on how to access these refer to the chapter on Related Documentation [page 37]
Deployment Phase
The Deployment phase covers the actual go-live and support activities in your project Aftersuccessful tests you transport the switch activities to your productive system You release the EHPsystem for production operation and then close your projectThese tasks are usually performed by your system administrator and your Project Management OfficeFor further information on how to access the relevant information on this phase refer to the chapteron Related Documentation [page 37]For further information on theApplication LifecycleManagement see httpservicesapcomalm
32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in anExisting SAP ERP 60 System
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planthe installation of an enhancement package in an existing SAP ERP 60 system
12202010 PUBLIC 3364
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package32 Scenario A Enhancement Package Installation in an Existing SAP ERP 60 System
Caution
Before upgrading applying support packages or implementing an enhancement package ensurethat the equivalent SPs or SP stack of the application as well as for the corresponding SAP Netweaverrelease are available The upgrade will stop if the equivalent support package of the target releaseis missing It is not a prerequisite and not recommended to implement the latest SP stack in yoursource system before doing an upgrade or EHP implementation The support package equivalencelevels are described in SAP Note 1064635 for ERP and in SAP Note 1440337 for SAP NetWeaver asunderlying platformFor more information on the strategy for SP stacks see httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Process
1 You find out which of the new functions are relevant for your business2 You analyze the landscape dependencies3 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package4 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system with the newest SP for the
download of packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer5 You start aMaintenance Transaction for updating your system6 You download the installation queue and perform the installation
Note
You select the technical usages you want to apply to your systems The Maintenance Optimizerin the SAP Solution Manager downloads all required files and creates the stack configuration file(ldquostack XMLrdquo) that can be read by the installation tools to create a valid import queue
7 You analyze the impact of the business function activation with theImpact Analyzer (TransactionSWF5)
8 You activate the business functions9 You perform additional customizing activities if necessary10 You test the new functions
Tools
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer (mandatory)n SAP Enhancement Package Installer (SAPehpi)n Switch framework Impact Analyzer in transaction (SWF5)
3464 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 with Enhancement Packages
Note
If you want to activate a business function that does not belong to the technical usages that havebeen installed initially you must install the missing technical usage later There are two options toinstall additional technical usages
n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer The optimizer provides a configuration file(Stack XML which is then used for the installation with the EHP Installer (SAPehpi)
n Transaction SAINT You can use SAINT if you plan to install technical usages in addition to thetechnical usage Central Applications To use SAINT the software component SAP-APPL 605 needs tobe installed this component is part of the technical usage Central Applications
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
33 Scenario B New Installation of SAP ERP 60 withEnhancement Packages
This section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you plan anew installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
Enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 are always installed in a separate step after the installation ofSAP ERP 60 system
Process
1 You install the SAP systemThe installation of SAP ERP 60 including enhancement package 5 comprises the technical usageCentral Applications You can either use this system as it is or install further technical usages
2 If you want to install further technical usagesa) You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement packagesb) You ensure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizerc) You download the installation queued) You perform the installatione) You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)
3 You perform the customizing activities for the SAP system4 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
12202010 PUBLIC 3564
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including an Enhancement Package Installation
Tools
n Standard Installation tool (SAP Inst)n SAPehpi (mandatory) and SAINT to install additional technical usagesn Switch framework with Impact Analyzer (Transaction SWF5)
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
34 Scenario C Upgrade to SAP ERP 60 Including anEnhancement Package Installation
Customers who are upgrading from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 have the option of including partsof enhancement packages in the upgrade processIn phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to include partof an enhancement package into the upgrade processThis section gives you an overview of the required activities and related information when you planan upgrade from a lower release to SAP ERP 60 including enhancement packages
Caution
The use of SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer is mandatory to include enhancementpackages in your release upgrade
Process
1 You plan the upgrade to the new release Decide which parts of the enhancement package youwant to include into the upgrade procedure before you start with the upgrade
2 You identify the relevant installable parts of the enhancement package3 You make sure that you have set up your SAP Solution Manager system for the download of
packages and that you have configured the Maintenance Optimizer4 You download the required parts of the enhancement packages and support packages as well as
the enhancement package stack configuration file5 You perform the upgrade including parts of the enhancement package
In phase EHP_Inclusion of the upgrade a dialog screen appears and asks if you want to includeparts of an enhancement packages in to the upgrade process
6 You activate the business functions using the switch framework (transaction SWF5)7 You perform the delta customizing activities for the SAP system8 You test the new business functions in the SAP system
3664 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Tools
n Standard Upgrade Tools (SAPup SAPjup)n SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer
Related Documentation
n SAP ERP 60 Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP Component Installation Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
n SAP ERP 60 Upgrade Master Guide refer to httpservicesapcomerp-inst
35 Related Documentation
Requirements Phase
n A good starting point is the Enhancement Package Info Centerhttpservicesapcomerp-ehp which provides a single point of access to all relatedinformation about SAP enhancement packages On this page you find different information levelssorted by the different functional areas such as Financials or Logistics
n SAP Solution Browser Tool This tool delivers a summary of key functionalchanges between two releases or SAP enhancement packages and is available athttpsolutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
n Information on SAP Help Portal Helps you to understand the business function conceptAvailable at httphelpsapcom SAP ERP SAP ERP Enhancement Packages Business Functions(for example SAP Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 Introduction Enhancement Packages and BusinessFunctions
Further information is also available at the Help Portal under ltSAP application of the Business Suite forexample SAP ERP SAP Library Business Function Sets and Business Functions All business functions aredescribed there By using the links to the application documentation you get detailed informationabout the content of each business function
Design Phase
Additional Documents and Related SAP Notes
For more detailed documentation and information see SAP Service Market Place athttpservicesapcomerp-ehp-inst SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 60After having read this master guide we recommend you read the following guides in the followingsequence
1 How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP A Practical Guide2 First Steps Document
12202010 PUBLIC 3764
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
The first steps document helps you to get started with SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60It also contains important information and sources of existing documentation
Further information you also find in the following SAP notes
n 1324838 mdash Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP Required SWCn 1122966 ‒ Maintenance Optimizer Notes for Enhancement Packagesn 1318299 mdash General information about Add-On products and their compatibility with
enhancement package 5
Tools
The system landscape in SAP Solution Manager (transaction SMSY) must be defined and up-to-date(at least SP 23)as well as the Maintenance Optimizer must be set up and running Helpful informationis summarized in the ldquoHow to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5rdquo guideFor more information about SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer see the following
n SAP Library at httphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager Change Request ManagementMaintenance Optimizer
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsolutionmanager Media LibraryDocumentation
n SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcommopz
For more information about the SAP Enhancement Package Installer see the Installation Guide -SAP Enhancement Package Installation for your operating system database and technology Youfind the guide in the SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP ERP60 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 60 SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems For additional documentation see SAP Service Marketplace at
n httpservicesapcominstallnw70 Installation Guide Enhancement Package Installation
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems Installation Guide - SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 - Using SAINTJSPM
n httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60 EnhancementPackage Installation on Existing SAP Systems SAP Enhancement Package Installation on Systems (using SAPehpi)
For additional information about SAPehpi refer to SAP Note 1302772 (and related SAP Notes)
Build and Test Phase
Find related documentation on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomerp-ehpChoose the identified functional area and navigate to information Level 4 Detailed OnlineInformation Assess each business function using all related information ‒ presented in a tabular listwith links to test catalogs release notes and business function-related dependencies
3864 PUBLIC 12202010
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
3 Installation of an Enhancement Package35 Related Documentation
Further information is available after the technical installation of SAP enhancement packagesCall transaction code SFW5 to use the Impact Analyzer tool To use the Impact Analyzer starttransaction SFW5 right-click a business function and choose Impact AnalyzerSwitch BC Sets are also delivered with business functions They are unpacked automatically whenyou activate a business function Later during maintenance updates or fixes to Switch BC-Set contentare automatically unpacked for already active business functionsProceed as follows to get information about the individual business functions using the SAPtest catalog
1 Call transaction SFW5 You access the transaction from the Implementation Guide under ActivateBusiness Functions
2 In the Test Catalog column select the specific test catalog3 Open the descriptions for the respective test cases
For general information about the use of test cases see SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom by using the search term Test Workbench For information about usingthe test case templates for the business functions see the introductory documentation for theenhancement packages This information is available by calling transaction SFW5 Navigate to thedocumentation of a business function and expand the introductory section
12202010 PUBLIC 3964
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
A Appendix
A Appendix
A1 Media List
You install the current enhancement package with the following product versionEHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702Software Components and DVD CD StructureThis section summarizes the exact location of the required software components on thecorresponding DVD(s) and CD(s) shipped with the EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 packageIf appropriate references to other sources are also included Product version EHP 5 for SAPERP 60 NW 702 requires the minimum support package stack 16 or higher of SAP ERP 60You find more information about Support Package stacks in the SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomsp-stacks Also review the corresponding Release and InformationNotes (RIN) SAP Note 849887 includes information about all RINs issued for SAP ERPSAP delivers several data carriers for the product version EHP 5 for SAP ERP 60 NW 702 Thesedata carriers include the software components which you need in order to install SAP ERP 60together with enhancements from the enhancement package If you intend to install a systemlandscape which consists of SAP ERP 60 without enhancement package use the DVD set for SAPERP 60 Support Release 3
A2 Related SAP Notes
These SAP Notes provided on the further pages contain the most recent information on theinstallation as well as corrections to the installation documentationThe content description of each note describes the functional area or topic about it Read the SAPNotes of your interestYou can find the most up-to-date version of each SAP Note on SAP Service Marketplace athttpservicesapcomnotes or by following the links below
SAP Note Number Title Content
Related to SAP ERP
12202010 PUBLIC 4164
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
A AppendixA2 Related SAP Notes
SAP Note Number Title Content
838402 Problems with Non-Unicode SystemLandscapes
Non-Unicode code pages support only asmall portion of the world-wide existingcharacter sets Any character conversionbased on these code pages therefore bearsthe risk of silent data loss
849887 SAP ERP 60 Support Package StacksRelease and Info Note
List of all SAP ERP 60 Release andInformation Notes (RIN) issued for SAPERP 60
998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 60 -Enhancement Packages
Information about the limitations for SAPenhancement packages for SAP ERP 60
1064635 SAP ERP Enhancement Packages SP StacksRelease Info Note
List of all Release Information Notes forSAP ERP Enhancement Package ReleasesSAP ERP Enhancement Package SupportPackage (SP) Stacks Corresponding orequivalent SAP ERP 60 Support PackageStacks
1318299 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60 Compatible Add-ons
You plan to run SAP enhancement package5 for SAP ERP 60 together with an Add-Onon the same system In this SAP Note youfind information about the points youneed to consider
1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5for SAP ERP 60
The SAP enhancement package 5 for SAPERP 60 complements SAP ERP 60 in anumber of focus areas Enhancementpackages are easy to install and theyimmediately add incremental valueto your business processes withoutdisruption We will update this SAP Noteafter publication
1324838 Enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 60Required SWC
Information about the relation betweenbusiness function and technical usage forthe current enhancement package
1484460 SAP ERP EnhanPk5 SP Stacks - Release ampInformation Note
This Release Information Note (RIN)contains information and references tonotes for applying Support Package (SP)Stacks of SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Related to SAP NetWeaver
1302772 Additional Information ‒ SAPEnhancement Package installer 702
Corrections for errors in the installationprocedure Preparations for theinstallation Additional information to theguides
4264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP Note Number Title Content
1440337 SP Equivalence for UpdateUpgrade toEHP2 for SAP NW 70
You are performing an upgrade or updateto SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 70 andneed to know the required SPS level of thetarget release
Related to SAP Solution Manager
1122966 Maintenance Optimizer Notes forEnhancement Packages
You want to import ERP 60 EnhancementPackages using theMaintenanceOptimizerThe import is possible as of SAP SolutionManager 40 Support Package 13
Related to Enterprise Services
1224284 Enterprise Services Installing andAccessing the SOA Docu
You want to use enterprise services andneed an overview which sets of servicesare available how to install and accessthe documentation and which productversions software components technicalusages and business functions theyrequire
1359215 Technical prerequisites for using enterpriseservices
You want to install an enhancementpackage andor you want to use enterpriseservices and need to know how to ensurethat the services are available and can beactivated in your system
Related to BI Content
1345320 Business Objects Enterprise Integration toNetWeaver BI
You want to install the componentsrequired for using the SAP-deliveredCrystal Reports against NetWeaver BI
1353044 Installation Guide Crystal Report Adapter To use the integration of Crystal Reportinto the Advanced List Viewer (ALV) it isrequired to install a frontend componenton the client desktop machine This notedescribes the supported platforms theprerequisites and the installation steps
A3 Related Documentation
The following table lists additional documentation for your reference
Title Location
How to Install SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAPERP 60 A Practical Guide
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
12202010 PUBLIC 4364
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
A AppendixA3 Related Documentation
SAP ERP 60 Master Guide and SAP ERP 60 UpgradeMaster Guide
httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
All SAP ERP-related component installation guides httpservicesapcomerp-inst SAP BusinessSuite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancement packagesfor SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP60
Planning Guide mdash SAP Business Suite LandscapeImplementation
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Installation Guide SAP Enhancement PackageInstallation Using SAP Enhancement Package Installer(SAPehpi) 702
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting and Administration for InstallationsUsing SAPehpi (ABAP)
httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
Troubleshooting for Installations Using SAPehpi (Java) httpservicesapcominstguides SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP ERP SAP enhancementpackages for SAP ERP 60 SAP Enhancement Package 5 forSAP ERP 60
All SAP ERP-related component upgrade (andmigration) guides
httpservicesapcomerp-upgrade SAP ERPUpgrade
SAP Industry Master Guides httpservicesapcominstguides IndustrySolutions
SAP NetWeaver 70 Guides httpservicesapcominstguidesNw70
SAP NetWeaver Installation Guides (including MasterGuide)
httpservicesapcominstallNw70
SAP NetWeaver Upgrade (and Migration) Guides httpservicesapcomupgradeNw70
SAP NetWeaver Maintenance httpservicesapcomMaintenanceNw70
SAP NetWeaver mdash Notes httpservicesapcomSAPNotesNw70
SAP Terminology Database httpservicesapcomsapterm
General Information on SAP ERP httpservicesapcomerp
Hardware Sizing httpservicesapcomsizing
Planning the System Infrastructure (TechnicalInfrastructure)
httpservicesapcomnetwork
Security Guide httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Overview of platform and technology related topics httpservicesapcomplatforms
4464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Support Package Stack Strategy httpservicesapcomsp-stacks
Product Availability Matrix httpservicesapcompam
Safeguarding Services for Upgrade httpservicesapcomsafeguardingupgrade
Upgrade Adjustments with SAPSPDD httpservicesapcomspau
SAP Solution Browser solutionbrowsererpsapfmpmediacom
High Availability httpservicesapcomha
SAP Note Search httpservicesapcomnotes
SAP ERP Business Map httpservicesapcombusinessmaps
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal or SAP NW ‒ EP CoreInformation
httpservicesapcomnw-ep
Upgrade Road Map (latest version) httpservicesapcomsolutionmanage
Downloads Other Content
SoftwareSupport Package Download Area httpservicesapcomswdc
R3 Plug-in httpservicesapcomr3-plug-in
SAP NW - Enterprise Portal SAP NW ‒ EP CoreContent
httpservicesapcomep-content
SAP NetWeaver Rapid Installer httpservicesapcomnw-ri
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence documentation httpservicesapcombi
SAP Learning Solution documentation httpservicesapcomlearningsolution
SAP Product Lifecycle Management httpservicesapcomplm
SAP Internet Sales in SAP ERP httpservicesapcomisa-r3
A4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
To plan your system landscape you can use a few tools and resources that are available to you asSAP customer
Tools
On SAP Service Marketplace we provide some tools that allow you to look up more detailedinformation about business scenarios business processes and implementable steps These toolsinclude the following
12202010 PUBLIC 4564
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Tools for Looking Up Information about Business Processes Scenarios and Implementable Steps
Tool Purpose
Business process repository (BPR) viewer To look up descriptions of business scenarios businessprocesses and implementable steps
Scenario and process component list To look up the required components and releases for abusiness scenario business process or implementablestep
In addition there are tools in SAP Solution Manager that support you before during or after theinstallation of your SAP product or SAP enhancement package These tools include
Tools for Supporting Installations and Upgrades
Tool Purpose
Solution Manager System Landscape To model and set up your system landscape
SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer To install support packages and SAP enhancementpackages
Business process repository To access configuration documentation links toCustomizing activities and master data transactionsspecifically tailored for individual business processesbusiness scenarios or implementable steps
Business process change analyzer (available with SAPenhancement package 1 for SAP Solution Manager70)
To analyze the effects of transports and supportpackages as well as activation logs for businessfunctions
Note
As of SAP Solution Manager 70 with support package 23 these tools have been enhanced to providea better support for the setup of your system landscape and for installing and activating businessfunctions For more information see SAP Library for SAP Solution Manager on SAP Help Portal athttphelpsapcom under SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager Implementation Content
To get implementation content that supports you during the configuration of your businessprocesses business scenarios and implementable steps you need the SAP Solution Manager add-onImplementation Content ST-ICO 155 L022 (SP25)
SAP Business Suite Landscape Implementation mdash Technical Planning Guide
To get an overview of the necessary steps for planning a system landscape use the Landscape Implementationmdash Technical Planning Guide on SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides underSAP Business Suite Applications The guide also provides you with more information about the
following
4664 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
n Examples of reference system landscapesn Planning tools such as the business process repositoryn Deployment optionsn Typical implementation process
A41 Business Process Repository (BPR) Viewer
The business process repository viewer (BPR viewer) is a tool on SAP Service Marketplace that allowsyou to preview the existing business scenarios business processes and implementable steps that areshipped as part of SAP Solution Manager content You can make use of the information in SAPSolution Manager during your implementation project by taking the pre-delivered implementationcontent as the starting point for your project scope The implementation content is delivered withthe following assigned information
n Description of the business scenario process or implementable stepn Configuration content (Customizing activities or configuration documentation)
A42 Using the BPR Viewer
Calling Up the BPR ViewerYou can call up the BPR viewer directly using the Internet addresshttpsimplementationcontentsapcombpr Alternatively you can also call up the Internetaddress httpservicesapcombpr first to see more background information about the BPRviewer and additional material on SAP Service Marketplace
Working with the BPR ViewerTo call up information about business scenarios business processes or implementable steps navigatethe following paths in the BPR viewer
BPR Object Location
Business scenario Under SolutionsApplications
Business process Under Organizational Areas
Implementable step Under SolutionsApplications
For each business scenario business process or implementable step you can select between differentversions that depend on varying components and releases To display the descriptions of a businessscenario business process or implementable step choose the Documentation tab page To displayconfiguration documentation choose the Configuration tab page
12202010 PUBLIC 4764
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
A AppendixA4 Tools and Resources for Planning Your System Landscape
Note
The BPR Viewer displays all descriptions but only a selection of the configuration documentationTo view all configuration documentation install and use SAP Solution Manager at your customersite
A43 Scenario and Process Component List
The scenario and process component list (SCLPCL) is a tool on the SAP Service Marketplace thatallows you to find realization alternatives for SAP solutions business scenarios and processes for yourSAP enhancement package installation You find the tool at httpservicesapcomsclThe SCLPCL helps you to bridge the gap between the business view and the technical view in SAPrsquosproducts It shows you which application components are needed to realize a business scenario or aprocess and which business scenarios are possible with a given set of application components
A44 Using the SCLPCL
1 Go to SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomscl2 To start the SCLPCL choose Start Application
The following selection options are providedn SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
With this option you can browse SAPrsquos solutions business scenarios and processes You canfind out which components are needed and the available alternatives
n SAP Components and Possible ScenariosThis option allows you to browse SAPrsquos products and components and to find out whichbusiness scenarios and processes you can realize using the components
For more information on how to use the tool refer to the Help section3 Select SAP Scenarios and Realization Alternatives
Select one or several scenarios processes and variants you want to realize You can make yourselection by using an alphabetical index or a full-text search It is also possible to see all scenariosfor a certain solution You will then get a list of the alternative ways to realize these scenarios Youcan also search for the identified business functions of a SAP enhancement packageIn the following steps we chose the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP as an example
4 Add the scenario Billing Analysis in ERP to the Selected ScenariosProcessesVariants list and choose ShowRealization Alternatives The SCLPCL then lists the different possibilities With options likeValidity youcan switch between possible and impossible realization alternatives TheOptional Comp dropdownlist helps you to find the minimum required SAP product versions
4864 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
A AppendixA5 SAP Solution Manager
A5 SAP Solution Manager
SAP provides the SAP Solution Manager as the highly recommended platform to efficiently supportthe implementation of your solution Using SAP Solution Manager will significantly acceleratethe implementation process and help you to achieve your business goals At the same time SAPwill be able to deliver Support Services based on the business scenarios designed and documentedin SAP Solution Manager Implementation content for your solution may further accelerate theimplementation process For information about availability of content specifically tailored to yoursolution see SAP Service Marketplace under servicesapcomsolutionmanager
A51 Extended Implementation Content in SAP SolutionManager
In the business process repository of SAP Solution Manager you can find high-quality businessprocesses under SolutionsApplications Extended Implementation Content for Lines of Business These businessprocesses are highly demanded by consultants and customers and provide optimized configurationinformation for various lines of business (for example Finance Sales Manufacturing and SupplyChain)Extended implementation content for lines of business is characterized by carefully draftedconfiguration information including the following
n Configuration information is assigned to all business processes This process-specific configurationinformation always contains a clear reference to additional basic configuration settings that areavailable for the required components of a process Therefore when you include a businessprocess in a self-defined scenario you can easily identify all relevant configuration settings that arerelevant for your project
n Configuration information that is specific for an optional process step is directly assigned to thatprocess step Therefore when you remove an optional process step from your project becauseyou do not need it the corresponding configuration activities are also automatically excludedfrom your implementation project
For your implementation project this means
n With the extended implementation content the implementation of a business process is easierthan before
n You can adjust SAP business processes to your own enterprise-specific requirementsn You can be sure to get all required configuration information if you include an SAP business
process in a self-defined business scenario
12202010 PUBLIC 4964
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
A6 Implementable Steps
In the following section you will get an overview of implementable steps offered by SAP Animplementable step is part of an end-to-end process and describes the scope of an implementationproject (which typically lasts approximately one to three months) It addresses a single line ofbusiness It creates value in itself and therefore represents an entity that is implementable Theimplementable steps listed here are grouped according to business logicmdash each implementable stepbelongs to one or several end-to-end processes
Note
The list of implementable steps in this section contain all of the implementable steps that areavailable for SAP Business Suite customers It was created to give you an overview of what is availablein addition to the business processes or business scenarios that are described in detail in this MasterGuide Note that implementable steps often run across several SAP components such as SAP ERPSAP CRM SAP SCM or SAP SRM So if you want to implement an implementable step make surethat you have licensed and installed the required SAP components and releases
You can find the implementable steps in the business process repository (BPR) of SAP SolutionManager To read the descriptions of the implementable steps or to find more information aboutrequired components and releases use planning tools such as the BPR viewer and the SCLPCLviewer For more information about these tools see Tools for Planning Your System Landscape [page 45]
A61 Implementable Steps in SAP Solution Manager
You can find the following implementable steps in the business process repository of SAP SolutionManager under SolutionsApplications Cross-Application Implementation Packages Scenarios
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Group CloseAccelerate Financial Close
Local Close
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Lead and Opportunity Management
Lead-to-Cash
Sales Performance Management
Accelerating Lead-to-Cash
Sales Planning
5064 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Account and Content Management
Sales Planning
Account amp Trade Promotion Management
Trade Promotion Management
Keep the Assets Safe
Keep the Environment Safe
Keep the People Safe
Asset Safety and Compliance
Keep the Stakeholders Informed and Involved
Conduct Improvement Programs
Optimize Maintenance amp Plant Operations
Asset Visibility and Performance
Set Up Plant Dashboards and Act on Alerts
Administer HR Data
Analyze Labor Costs
Benefits Administration
Financials Period-End Close
Run Payroll
Automate Global HR and Payroll
Time Management
Onboarding
Planning amp Budgeting
Reporting amp Analytics
Build the Workforce
Talent Acquisition
Central Contract Management
Central Sourcing
Operational Procurement
Centralized Sourcing and Contract Management
Supplier Management
Collaborative Demand Management
Sales amp Operations Planning
Collaborative Demand and Supply Planning
Supply Planning
Convergent Charging
Convergent Invoicing
Credit amp Collections Management
Financial Customer Care and Dispute Management
Consume to Cash in High Volume Business
Receivables Management and Payment Handling
12202010 PUBLIC 5164
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Change Audit and Approval
Change Implementation
Change Initiation
Continuous Product Change and Transformation
Change Investigation
Managing Innovation
Portfolio Management
Program and Project Management
Continuous Product and Service Innovation
Strategy and Planning
Multifunctional Shared Service Framework
Shared Services Operations
Corporate Shared Service Center
Track Delivery Performance
Additional Processes for Creating the Optimal Offer
Campaign Management
Catalog Management in CRM
Creating the Optimal Offer
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Quotation and Order Management in CRM (withCRM Billing and Rebates)
Creating the Optimal Offer
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Accounts Receivable
Billing
Collections Management
Credit Evaluation and Management
Customer Care
Dispute Resolution
Customer To Cash (B2B)
e-Invoicing
Compensation Management
Employee Performance Management
Succession Management
Talent Assessment and Review
Talent Development amp Learning
Develop a High-Performing Workforce
Talent Intelligence
5264 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Complaints and Returns Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
IC Management
IC Service
Service Contract Management
Service Order Management
Differentiation Through Service Excellence
Service Planning
HCM Service Delivery
Operations amp Governance
Drive Efficient HR Operations
Shared Services Framework
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (DiscreteIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Discrete Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for DiscreteIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Discrete Industries)
Enterprise-Level Planning and Control (ProcessIndustries)
Manufacturing Execution (Process Industries)
Efficient Manufacturing Operations for ProcessIndustries
Plant-Level Operations (Process Industries)
Developing Compliant Product
Maintaining Compliant Product
Embedded Product Compliance
Manufacturing Compliant Product
Component and Task Sourcing
Product Design
Integrated Product Development for DiscreteIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Material Sourcing
Product Development
Integrated Product Development for ProcessIndustries
Ramp-Up for Production
Contract Management
Operational Procurement
Spend Analytics
Integrated Sourcing and Procurement
Strategic Sourcing
12202010 PUBLIC 5364
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Account and Contact Management
Campaign Management
Campaign Management in CRMWeb Channel
IC Marketing
IC Sales with CRM Sales Order
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Lead-to-Cash
Loyalty Management
Modeling the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW)
Quotation and Order Management in CRM WebChannel
Interactive Customer Lifecycle Management
Segmentation and List Management
Bank Communications Automation
Core Accounts Payable
Invoice Management Automation
Invoice To Pay
Record Retention and Archiving
Customer Commitment
Global Trade Management
Inbound Freight Management
Logistics and Fulfillment Management
Storage and Fulfillment
Improve Planning and ForecastingManage Financial and Operational Performance
Profitability Management
Access Management
Duty Reduction amp Trade Compliance
Enterprise Risk Management
Managing Risk and Compliance
Risk-Based Internal Controls
Manage Global Financial Risks
Managing Cash and Liquidity
Optimize Debt and Investments Strategies
Managing Treasury and Financial Risk
Optimize Payments and Bank Communication
5464 PUBLIC 12202010
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
A AppendixA6 Implementable Steps
End-to-End Process Implementable Step
Manufacturing Network Planning
Material Supply amp Replenishment
Outsourced Manufacturing
Manufacturing Network Planning and Execution
Production Planning amp Execution
Service Optimization
Service Order Completion
Service Order Management
Optimize Workforce Scheduling
Shift amp Schedule Management
Asset Planning and Scheduling
Operations and Maintenance
Service Procurement
Optimized Asset Operations and Maintenance
Spare Parts Management
Asset Information Management
Asset Portfolio Management
Planning Building and Commissioning Assets
Capital Project Management
Acquisition amp Construction Management
Facilities Management
Real Estate Lifecycle Management
Lease amp Space Management
Service Parts Claims and Returns
Service Parts Planning and Procurement
Service Parts Sales
Service Parts Planning and Logistics
Service Parts Warehousing
12202010 PUBLIC 5564
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
This page is left blank for documentsthat are printed on both sides
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
B Reference
B Reference
B1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
The following is an overview of themost important documentation types that you need in thevarious phases in the life cycle of SAP software
Cross-Phase Documentation
SAPterm is SAPrsquos terminology database It contains SAP-specific vocabulary in over 30 languages aswell as many glossary entries in English and German
n Target groupl Relevant for all target groups
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom Glossary
l In the SAP system in transaction STERM
SAP Library is a collection of documentation for SAP software covering functions and processes
n Target groupl Consultants
l System administratorsl Project teams for implementations or upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom (also available as documentation DVD)
The security guide describes the settings for a medium security level and offers suggestions forraising security levels A collective security guide is available for SAP NetWeaver This documentcontains general guidelines and suggestions SAP applications have a security guide of their own
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomsecurityguide
Implementation
Themaster guide is the starting point for implementing an SAP solution It lists the requiredinstallable units for each business or IT scenario It provides scenario-specific descriptions of
12202010 PUBLIC 5764
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
preparation execution and follow-up of an implementation It also provides references to otherdocuments such as installation guides the technical infrastructure guide and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The installation guide describes the technical implementation of an installable unit takinginto account the combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe anybusiness-related configuration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for implementations
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager ‒ SAP Solution Manager is a life-cycleplatform One of its main functions is the configuration of business scenarios business processesand implementable steps It contains Customizing activities transactions and so on as well asdocumentation
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementationsn Current versionl In SAP Solution Manager
The Implementation Guide (IMG) is a tool for configuring (Customizing) a single SAP systemThe Customizing activities and their documentation are structured from a functional perspective(In order to configure a whole system landscape from a process-oriented perspective SAP SolutionManager which refers to the relevant Customizing activities in the individual SAP systems is used)
n Target groupl Solution consultants
l Project teams for implementations or upgradesn Current versionl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Tools Customizing IMG
Production Operation
The technical operations manual is the starting point for operating a system that runs on SAPNetWeaver and precedes the application operations guides of SAP Business Suite The manual refers
5864 PUBLIC 12202010
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
users to the tools and documentation that are needed to carry out various tasks such as monitoringbackuprestore master data maintenance transports and tests
n Target groupl System administrators
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The application operations guide is used for operating an SAP application once all tasks in thetechnical operations manual have been completed It refers users to the tools and documentationthat are needed to carry out the various operations-related tasks
n Target groupl System administratorsl Technology consultantsl Solution consultants
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Upgrade
The upgrade master guide is the starting point for upgrading the business scenarios and processes ofan SAP solution It provides scenario-specific descriptions of preparation execution and follow-up ofan upgrade It also refers to other documents such as upgrade guides and SAP Notes
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
The upgrade guide describes the technical upgrade of an installable unit taking into accountthe combinations of operating systems and databases It does not describe any business-relatedconfiguration
n Target groupl Technology consultantsl Project teams for upgrades
n Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcominstguides
Release notes are documents that contain short descriptions of new features in a particular releaseor changes to existing features since the previous release Release notes about ABAP developmentsare the technical prerequisite for generating delta and upgrade Customizing in the ImplementationGuide (IMG)
n Target group
12202010 PUBLIC 5964
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
B ReferenceB1 The Main SAP Documentation Types
l Consultants
l Project teams for upgradesn Current versionl On SAP Service Marketplace at httpservicesapcomreleasenotesl In the SAP menu of the SAP system under Help Release Notes (only ABAP developments)
6064 PUBLIC 12202010
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriateentries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
ExampleExample
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access tospecific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example n Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titlespushbutton labels menu names and menu options
n Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example n Output on the screen following a user action for example messagesn Source code or syntax quoted directly from a programn File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program namestransaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming languagewhen they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
12202010 PUBLIC 6164
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reserved
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of othersoftware vendors
Microsoft Windows Excel Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft CorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database System i System i5 System p System p5 System x System z System z10 System z9 z10z9 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries eServer zVM zOS i5OS S390 OS390 OS400 AS400 S390 Parallel Enterprise ServerPowerVM Power Architecture POWER6+ POWER6 POWER5+ POWER5 POWER OpenPower PowerPC BatchPipesBladeCenter System Storage GPFS HACMP RETAIN DB2 Connect RACF Redbooks OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIXIntelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM CorporationLinux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the US and other countriesAdobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe SystemsIncorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle CorporationUNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Citrix Systems IncHTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg World Wide Web ConsortiumMassachusetts Institute of TechnologyJava is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems IncJavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implementedby NetscapeSAP R3 SAP NetWeaver Duet PartnerEdge ByDesign SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germanyand other countriesBusiness Objects and the Business Objects logo BusinessObjects Crystal Reports Crystal Decisions Web IntelligenceXcelsius and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd in the United States and in other countriesAll other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in thisdocument serves informational purposes only National product specifications may varyThese materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies(ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall notbe liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services arethose that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing hereinshould be construed as constituting an additional warranty
This document was created using stylesheet 2007-12-10 (V72) XSL-FO V51 Gamma and XSLT processor SAXON 652from Michael Kay (httpsaxonsfnet) XSLT version 1
6264 PUBLIC 12202010
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Javatrade Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable andsevere malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited as is any decompilation of these componentsAny Javatrade Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAPrsquos Support Services and may not be modified oraltered in any way
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcominstguides
12202010 PUBLIC 6364
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2010 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice